Professional Documents
Culture Documents
User’s Guide
Doc ID VIEWME-UM003C-EN-E
Contacting Technical Support Telephone—440-646-5800
Rockwell Software Technical Support Fax—440-646-5801
World Wide Web—http://www.software.rockwell.com or http://support.rockwellautomation.com
Copyright Notice © 2003 Rockwell Software Inc., a Rockwell Automation company. All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
Portions copyrighted by the Allen-Bradley Company, LLC, a Rockwell Automation company.
This manual and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell
Software Inc. Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell
Software Inc. is strictly prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.
VBA and DCOM, Copyright 1996, 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Trademark The Rockwell Software logo, RSLinx, RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500, RSTools, RSView, RSView Machine
Notices Edition, RSView ME Station, RSView Studio, A.I. Series, Advanced Interface (A.I.) Series,
ControlView, FactoryTalk, Object Smart Path, RAC6182, and WINtelligent LOGIC 5 are trademarks
of Rockwell Software Inc., a Rockwell Automation company.
PLC-5 is a registered trademark, and ControlNet, Data Highway Plus, DH+, MicroLogix,
MobileView, PanelView Plus, VersaView CE, PLC-5/20E, PLC-5/40E, PLC-5/80E, SLC, SLC 5/01,
SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, and SoftLogix are trademarks of the
Allen-Bradley Company, LLC, a Rockwell Automation company.
Adobe, Acrobat, Photoshop, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
TrueType is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk,
Inc. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel Corporation, and
Xerox Corporation. Modicon is a registered trademark of Groupe Schneider. Intel and Pentium are
registered trademarks of the Intel Corporation. Zip is a trademark of Iomega Corporation.
KEPServerEnterprise is a trademark of Kepware Technologies. ActiveSync, ActiveX, Microsoft, MS-
DOS, OpenType, Visual Basic, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. OPC is a trademark of the OPC Foundation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Warranty This Rockwell Software product is warranted in accord with the product license. The product’s
performance will be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator
control, and other related factors. The product’s implementation may vary among users.
This manual is as up-to-date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying software
may have changed since that time. Rockwell Software reserves the right to change any information
contained in this manual or the software at any time without prior notice.
The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details or variations in the equipment,
procedure, or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency
during installation, operation, or maintenance.
Doc ID ViewME-UM003C-EN-E
December 2003
Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... P-1
About the documentation ............................................................................P-1
Finding the information you need .......................................................... P-2
Try the User's Guide and Help first..........................................................................P-2
Information on the Internet....................................................................................... P-2
Contacting Rockwell Software Technical Support ................................................. P-3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Contents I
i
Showing and hiding items in the main window .......................................................2-8
Using the Application Explorer ................................................................2-8
Viewing the Application Explorer .......................................................................... 2-10
Moving the Application Explorer ........................................................................... 2-10
Working with editors ..................................................................................... 2-11
Locating editors ......................................................................................................... 2-11
Viewing an editor's components ............................................................................. 2-11
Opening editors ......................................................................................................... 2-12
Closing editors............................................................................................................ 2-13
Entering information in spreadsheets .............................................. 2-13
Working with components ........................................................................ 2-15
Creating components ................................................................................................ 2-15
Opening components ............................................................................................... 2-15
Saving components ................................................................................................... 2-16
Closing components.................................................................................................. 2-16
Adding components into an application ................................................................ 2-17
Deleting components................................................................................................ 2-19
Removing components............................................................................................. 2-19
Renaming components ............................................................................................. 2-20
Duplicating components .......................................................................................... 2-20
Printing .................................................................................................................... 2-21
Selecting a printer ...................................................................................................... 2-21
Printing at run time ................................................................................................... 2-23
Chapter 3
Planning applications.............................................................................................................3-1
Understanding the process .........................................................................3-1
Collecting data .....................................................................................................3-2
Designing an HMI tag database ...............................................................3-2
Collecting information .................................................................................................3-3
ii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Organizing tags............................................................................................................. 3-3
Planning graphic displays ........................................................................... 3-3
Developing a hierarchy of displays ........................................................................... 3-4
Creating a template to ensure consistency ............................................................... 3-4
Usability......................................................................................................................... 3-6
Planning alarms .................................................................................................. 3-6
Providing information for the operator .............................................. 3-6
Local and information messages ............................................................................... 3-7
Diagnostics messages .................................................................................................. 3-7
Using trends .......................................................................................................... 3-7
Designing a secure system ........................................................................ 3-8
Chapter 4
Contents I
iii
About project settings ................................................................................. 4-12
Project window size and run-time screen resolution ........................................... 4-12
Title bar ....................................................................................................................... 4-15
Specifying project settings ...................................................................... 4-17
Viewing application properties ............................................................. 4-19
Viewing HMI server properties .............................................................. 4-20
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
iv I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
When to use data server tags ................................................................... 6-4
Eliminating duplication............................................................................................... 6-4
Using complex data ..................................................................................................... 6-4
Steps for using data server tags ............................................................ 6-4
When to use HMI tags .................................................................................... 6-5
Scaling, offsetting, or providing a range for data.................................................... 6-5
Storing values in RSView memory ............................................................................ 6-6
Steps for using HMI tags .............................................................................. 6-7
Browsing for tags .............................................................................................. 6-7
Browsing for off-line tags ............................................................................ 6-9
Using the Tag Browser ................................................................................ 6-10
Working with folders in the Tag Browser ....................................... 6-11
Showing server names............................................................................................... 6-11
Creating folders .......................................................................................................... 6-13
Refreshing the list of folders and tags .................................................................... 6-14
Working with tags in the Tag Browser ............................................. 6-14
Displaying tags ........................................................................................................... 6-14
Showing or hiding tag descriptions......................................................................... 6-14
Selecting tags............................................................................................................... 6-15
Using the Selected tags list ....................................................................................... 6-16
Displaying tag properties .......................................................................................... 6-18
Filtering tags ............................................................................................................... 6-19
Creating, editing, and importing HMI tags ............................................................ 6-20
Using tags and expressions in your application ....................... 6-21
Assigning tags ............................................................................................................. 6-22
Assigning tags to graphic objects ............................................................................ 6-22
Using expressions to manipulate tag values........................................................... 6-24
Substituting tag names used in graphic objects..................................................... 6-25
Logging tag values ......................................................................................... 6-26
Using macros to assign values to tags ........................................... 6-27
Contents I
v
Chapter 7
vi I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Resizing columns and rows ...................................................................................... 7-17
Creating tags ............................................................................................................... 7-17
Duplicating tags.......................................................................................................... 7-18
Editing tags ................................................................................................................. 7-18
Deleting tags ............................................................................................................... 7-19
Addressing syntax for device tags ..................................................... 7-19
Setting up HMI tag types ........................................................................... 7-21
Setting up analog tags................................................................................................ 7-21
Setting up digital tags................................................................................................. 7-25
Setting up string tags ................................................................................................. 7-26
Specifying a data source for HMI tags ............................................. 7-27
Specifying device as the data source ....................................................................... 7-27
Specifying memory as the data source.................................................................... 7-28
Other methods for creating HMI tags ............................................... 7-28
Creating tags as needed in other RSView editors ................................................. 7-28
Creating tags as needed in the Data Log Models editor ...................................... 7-29
Using the Tag Browser ............................................................................................. 7-31
Importing tags from a PLC database...................................................................... 7-33
Using the Tag Import and Export Wizard ............................................................ 7-35
Chapter 8
Contents I
vii
Setting up remote display changes.......................................................8-8
Setting up global connections ..................................................................8-9
Chapter 9
Setting up alarms........................................................................................................................9-1
About alarms .........................................................................................................9-2
Preparing to set up alarms ..........................................................................9-2
The data source.............................................................................................................9-2
Tags and expressions....................................................................................................9-3
Identifying alarm conditions .......................................................................................9-3
Importing and exporting alarm setup files................................................................9-3
How alarms work ................................................................................................9-4
Alarm triggers and trigger values................................................................................9-4
Alarm notification methods ........................................................................................9-4
Displaying alarm information .....................................................................................9-5
Responding to alarms...................................................................................................9-6
The alarm log file ..........................................................................................................9-9
Printing alarm information....................................................................................... 9-10
Alarm trigger data types ............................................................................ 9-11
The Value trigger type............................................................................................... 9-11
The Bit trigger type.................................................................................................... 9-13
The Least Significant Bit (LSBit) trigger type........................................................ 9-14
Tips for using array tags ............................................................................ 9-17
Equivalent data types ................................................................................................ 9-17
RSLinx Enterprise tag syntax................................................................................... 9-19
KEPServerEnterprise tag syntax............................................................................. 9-19
Optional alarm controls .............................................................................. 9-20
Controls that work with a specific alarm trigger................................................... 9-20
How the Handshake control works........................................................................ 9-21
How the Ack control works..................................................................................... 9-22
viii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
How the Remote Ack control works...................................................................... 9-22
How the Remote Ack Handshake control works................................................. 9-24
How the Message control works ............................................................................. 9-24
How the Message Notification control works ...................................................... 9-24
How the Message Handshake control works ........................................................ 9-25
Controls that apply to all alarms.............................................................................. 9-25
How the Silence control works................................................................................ 9-26
How the Remote Silence control works................................................................. 9-26
How the Remote Ack All control works ............................................................... 9-26
How the Status Reset control works ...................................................................... 9-27
How the Remote Status Reset control works ....................................................... 9-27
How the Close Display control works ................................................................... 9-27
How the Remote Close Display control works .................................................... 9-28
Summary of steps............................................................................................ 9-28
Using the Alarm Setup editor ................................................................. 9-29
Creating alarm triggers .............................................................................................. 9-30
Creating alarm messages .......................................................................... 9-33
Deleting messages...................................................................................................... 9-36
Copying messages ...................................................................................................... 9-36
Specifying how alarms are displayed,
stored, and silenced..................................................................................... 9-37
After you set up alarms ............................................................................................. 9-39
The [ALARM] display ..................................................................................... 9-40
The [ALARM MULTI-LINE] display ....................................................... 9-41
The [STATUS] display ................................................................................... 9-43
The [HISTORY] display ................................................................................ 9-44
Using displays from the library in your application ................ 9-46
Creating your own alarm display.......................................................... 9-47
Opening and closing the alarm display ........................................... 9-48
Opening the display................................................................................................... 9-48
Contents I
ix
Closing the display..................................................................................................... 9-48
How the alarm list graphic object works ....................................... 9-48
What is displayed ....................................................................................................... 9-49
How the list scrolls .................................................................................................... 9-50
How the alarm banner graphic object works .............................. 9-50
What is displayed ....................................................................................................... 9-51
How the alarm status list graphic object works ...................... 9-51
What is displayed ....................................................................................................... 9-52
What happens when the display is opened............................................................ 9-52
Using buttons with the alarm list,
alarm banner, and alarm status list ................................................. 9-53
Alarm buttons ............................................................................................................ 9-53
Linking buttons to objects ....................................................................................... 9-55
Key buttons ................................................................................................................ 9-56
Using alarm buttons to acknowledge,
silence, clear, and delete alarms ....................................................... 9-56
Acknowledging the selected alarm .......................................................................... 9-56
Acknowledging all alarms......................................................................................... 9-57
Silencing alarms.......................................................................................................... 9-58
Clearing and deleting messages ............................................................................... 9-58
Using alarm buttons to sort alarms
and set alarm status .................................................................................... 9-59
Sorting alarms............................................................................................................. 9-59
Resetting alarm status................................................................................................ 9-59
Retaining alarm status ............................................................................................... 9-60
Changing the alarm status displayed in the alarm status list ............................... 9-60
Chapter 10
x I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
How to set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics................................................................. 10-2
Destinations ................................................................................................................ 10-3
Message routing ......................................................................................................... 10-4
Categories.................................................................................................................... 10-5
Message severities ...................................................................................................... 10-5
Audiences.................................................................................................................... 10-6
Displaying diagnostics messages
during application development .......................................................... 10-7
Viewing FactoryTalk Diagnostics log files.................................... 10-8
Using the Diagnostics Setup tool ........................................................ 10-8
Contents I
xi
How the diagnostics list graphic object works ....................... 10-25
What is displayed ..................................................................................................... 10-25
Using buttons with the diagnostics list................................................................. 10-26
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
xii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Information messages versus local messages ........................................................ 12-2
Preparing to set up information messages ................................... 12-2
The data source .......................................................................................................... 12-2
Identifying the tags and values to monitor ............................................................ 12-2
How information messages work ........................................................ 12-3
Information messages and trigger values ............................................................... 12-4
The information message display ............................................................................ 12-5
Summary of steps............................................................................................ 12-6
Using the Information Messages editor .......................................... 12-7
Creating information messages ............................................................ 12-7
Deleting messages...................................................................................................... 12-8
Copying messages ...................................................................................................... 12-9
Setting up how information messages are displayed ........... 12-9
After you set up information messages ........................................ 12-11
The [INFORMATION] display ................................................................. 12-12
Creating your own information message display ................... 12-13
Opening and closing the information message display ..... 12-14
Opening the display................................................................................................. 12-14
Closing the display ................................................................................................... 12-14
How the information message display
graphic object works .................................................................................. 12-14
What is displayed ..................................................................................................... 12-15
Changing the message file used at run time ............................. 12-15
Chapter 13
Contents I
xiii
Using the View menu................................................................................................ 13-7
Using the Accept and Discard buttons .................................................................. 13-8
Using the tools ........................................................................................................... 13-8
The DEFAULT user................................................................................................. 13-9
Setting up user accounts for RSView users .............................. 13-10
Deleting RSView user accounts............................................................................. 13-12
Changing RSView user passwords ........................................................................ 13-12
Adding users or groups from a Windows domain ................... 13-12
Removing users or groups...................................................................................... 13-14
Providing a way for users to log in and log out ....................... 13-16
Logging in ................................................................................................................. 13-16
Logging out............................................................................................................... 13-17
Logging out automatically ...................................................................................... 13-17
Preventing unauthorized users
from stopping the application ............................................................. 13-18
Assigning security to graphic displays.......................................... 13-20
Summary of security features
in a sample startup display .................................................................. 13-22
Chapter 14
xiv I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Showing displays in grayscale................................................................................. 14-10
Using the grid ........................................................................................................... 14-10
Zooming in and out................................................................................................. 14-12
Correcting mistakes ................................................................................................. 14-12
Testing your displays as you work......................................................................... 14-13
Setting up graphic displays .................................................................... 14-14
About display types ................................................................................................. 14-14
Resizing displays....................................................................................................... 14-15
Specifying display settings ...................................................................................... 14-16
Creating a background for your display ........................................ 14-20
Using graphic libraries .............................................................................. 14-22
Creating graphic libraries ........................................................................................ 14-23
Using libraries as displays in your application ..................................................... 14-24
Location of library components ............................................................................ 14-24
Importing images into your application ........................................ 14-26
Bitmap images that come with RSView Studio................................................... 14-27
Importing bitmap and JPEG images .................................................................... 14-28
Using the Image Browser to import images ........................................................ 14-30
Tips for using images .............................................................................................. 14-32
Using parameter files ................................................................................. 14-33
About tag placeholders ........................................................................................... 14-34
Assigning parameter files to graphic displays ...................................................... 14-34
Summary of steps.......................................................................................... 14-38
Using the Parameters editor ................................................................................... 14-38
Creating parameter files .......................................................................................... 14-39
Using local messages ................................................................................ 14-40
Local messages versus information messages ..................................................... 14-40
Preparing to set up local messages ........................................................................ 14-40
How local messages work....................................................................................... 14-41
Local messages and trigger values ......................................................................... 14-43
Contents I
xv
Summary of steps .................................................................................................... 14-43
Using the Local Messages editor ........................................................................... 14-44
Creating local messages........................................................................................... 14-45
How the local message display graphic object works ........................................ 14-46
Printing displays............................................................................................. 14-47
Printing displays at run time .................................................................................. 14-47
Chapter 15
xvi I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Creating lines ............................................................................................................ 15-23
Creating polygons and polylines............................................................................ 15-24
Creating rectangles and squares............................................................................. 15-25
Creating rounded rectangles and squares............................................................. 15-26
Using .wmf and .dxf files........................................................................................ 15-27
Using ActiveX objects............................................................................................. 15-28
Tools and tips for working with objects ....................................... 15-30
Selecting and deselecting objects........................................................................... 15-31
Using the Object Explorer ..................................................................................... 15-32
Highlighting objects in the Object Explorer ....................................................... 15-35
Using the Properties dialog box ............................................................................ 15-37
Using the Property Panel........................................................................................ 15-42
Setting up properties ............................................................................................... 15-42
Assigning tags and expressions to an object’s controls ..................................... 15-45
Coloring objects using the color toolbars ............................................................ 15-47
Naming objects ........................................................................................................ 15-50
Testing how objects look in different states........................................................ 15-51
Assigning tags and expressions to graphic objects ............ 15-52
Assigning tags ........................................................................................................... 15-53
Using expressions to manipulate tag values......................................................... 15-55
Replacing tags using tag substitution .................................................................... 15-56
Using tag placeholders ............................................................................................ 15-58
Performing basic operations on objects ....................................... 15-60
Moving objects......................................................................................................... 15-60
Copying objects........................................................................................................ 15-61
Duplicating objects.................................................................................................. 15-63
Resizing objects........................................................................................................ 15-64
Reshaping drawing objects ..................................................................................... 15-66
Deleting objects........................................................................................................ 15-68
Working with groups of objects .......................................................... 15-68
Contents I
xvii
Grouping and ungrouping objects........................................................................ 15-68
Editing groups of objects ....................................................................................... 15-70
Editing objects within a group............................................................................... 15-71
Arranging objects .......................................................................................... 15-72
Layering objects ....................................................................................................... 15-72
Aligning objects ....................................................................................................... 15-74
Spacing objects......................................................................................................... 15-76
Flipping drawing objects ........................................................................................ 15-78
Rotating drawing objects ........................................................................................ 15-79
Locking objects into position ................................................................................ 15-81
Chapter 16
xviii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Ensuring values are read by the data source
before sending new values ................................................................... 16-23
Methods of Enter key handshaking ...................................................................... 16-23
Holding the value for a specific period of time .................................................. 16-24
Holding the value until the data source acknowledges
that it has read the value ........................................................................................ 16-25
Using buttons to operate the application .................................... 16-27
Setting up buttons to operate the application ......................... 16-29
Setting up the appearance of the button .............................................................. 16-31
Setting up a caption or image for the button ...................................................... 16-33
Using buttons with lists, trends, alarm banners,
and numeric input objects ...................................................................... 16-36
Working with lists, trends, alarm banners, and numeric input objects............ 16-38
Linking buttons to objects...................................................................................... 16-38
Setting up buttons to use with lists and trends ...................... 16-39
Setting up the appearance of the button .............................................................. 16-41
Setting up a caption or image for the button ...................................................... 16-43
Setting up whether the button press repeats when held down......................... 16-46
How to use push buttons ......................................................................... 16-47
Contents I
xix
Setting up the appearance of the latched push button
and how to unlatch it ............................................................................................. 16-68
Setting up what the latched push button does
when it is latched and unlatched ........................................................................... 16-69
Connecting the latched push button to data ....................................................... 16-75
Setting up multistate push buttons.................................................. 16-76
Setting up the appearance of the multistate push button
and how it changes state......................................................................................... 16-78
Setting up what the multistate push button does
when it is pressed and released.............................................................................. 16-80
Setting up whether the multistate push button press repeats
when held down....................................................................................................... 16-84
Connecting the multistate push button to data................................................... 16-85
Setting up interlocked push buttons ............................................... 16-86
Setting up the interlocked push button’s appearance and value ...................... 16-88
Setting up the appearance of the interlocked push button
when it is pressed and released.............................................................................. 16-89
Connecting the interlocked push button to data ................................................ 16-93
Setting up ramp buttons ........................................................................... 16-94
Setting up the appearance of the ramp button and how it works.................... 16-96
Setting up a caption and image for the ramp button ......................................... 16-99
Setting up whether the ramp button press repeats when held down ............ 16-102
Connecting the ramp button to data .................................................................. 16-103
How to use numeric displays .............................................................. 16-103
How values are displayed ..................................................................................... 16-103
Problems with displaying values.......................................................................... 16-104
Setting up numeric displays ................................................................ 16-104
Number formats .................................................................................................... 16-105
Setting up the appearance of the numeric display ............................................ 16-107
Connecting the numeric display to data............................................................. 16-109
Setting up numeric input enable buttons .................................. 16-109
xx I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Setting up the appearance and input focus
of the numeric input enable button ................................................................... 16-112
Setting up a caption or image for the numeric input enable button .............. 16-114
Setting up numeric and pop-up options
for the numeric input enable button.................................................................. 16-118
Setting up the how the numeric input enable button’s pop-up
works with an Enter key...................................................................................... 16-120
Connecting the numeric input enable button to data ...................................... 16-122
Setting up numeric input cursor points ....................................... 16-123
Activating the cursor point................................................................................... 16-123
Using the cursor point to ramp values ............................................................... 16-124
Setting up the cursor point................................................................................... 16-124
Setting up the appearance and key navigation
of the numeric input cursor point...................................................................... 16-126
Setting up numeric and pop-up options
for the numeric input cursor point ..................................................................... 16-129
Setting up the how the numeric input cursor point’s pop-up
works with an Enter key...................................................................................... 16-132
Connecting the numeric input cursor point to data ......................................... 16-133
How to use string displays ................................................................... 16-135
How values are displayed...................................................................................... 16-135
Setting up string displays ...................................................................... 16-135
Setting up the appearance of the string display................................................. 16-137
Connecting the string display to data.................................................................. 16-138
Setting up string input enable buttons ........................................ 16-139
Setting up the appearance and action of the string input enable button....... 16-141
Setting up a caption or image for the string input enable button .................. 16-143
Setting up the pop-up for the string input enable button ............................... 16-146
Setting up the how the string input enable button's pop-up works
with an Enter key.................................................................................................. 16-147
Connecting the string input enable button to data........................................... 16-148
Setting up goto display buttons ........................................................ 16-149
Contents I
xxi
Setting up the appearance of the goto display button ..................................... 16-151
Setting up a caption or image for the goto display button.............................. 16-154
Setting up close display buttons...................................................... 16-157
Setting up the appearance of the close display button..................................... 16-159
Setting up a caption or image for the close display button ............................. 16-161
Connecting the close display button to data ..................................................... 16-164
Setting up display list selectors ....................................................... 16-164
Setting up the appearance of the display list selector....................................... 16-166
Setting up which displays appear in the display list selector ........................... 16-168
How to use indicators .............................................................................. 16-171
Setting up multistate indicators ....................................................... 16-172
Importing a multistate indicator file ................................................................... 16-172
Setting up the appearance of the multistate indicator
and its number of states....................................................................................... 16-174
Setting up how the multistate indicator’s appearance
changes to match its value................................................................................... 16-175
Connecting the multistate indicator to data....................................................... 16-180
Setting up symbols ..................................................................................... 16-180
Setting up the appearance of the symbol and its number of states ............... 16-182
Setting up how the symbol changes appearance
when its value changes.......................................................................................... 16-182
Connecting the symbol to data............................................................................ 16-185
Setting up list indicators ....................................................................... 16-186
Setting up the appearance of the list indicator and its number of states ...... 16-188
Setting up how the list indicator’s appearance changes
when its value changes......................................................................................... 16-190
Connecting the list indicator to data................................................................... 16-193
How to use bar graphs, gauges, and scales ............................ 16-193
Bar graphs make it easy to compare values ....................................................... 16-193
Thresholds change a bar graph’s fill color ......................................................... 16-194
Use bar graphs with scales to show limits ......................................................... 16-194
xxii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Gauges make it easy to see limits ........................................................................ 16-195
Thresholds change a gauge’s fill color ................................................................ 16-195
Setting up bar graphs ............................................................................... 16-196
Setting up the appearance of the bar graph ....................................................... 16-198
Connecting the bar graph to data........................................................................ 16-200
Setting up gauges ....................................................................................... 16-200
Number formats .................................................................................................... 16-200
Setting up the appearance of the gauge.............................................................. 16-202
Setting up how the gauge works.......................................................................... 16-203
Connecting the gauge to data............................................................................... 16-205
Setting up scales ......................................................................................... 16-206
Setting up the appearance of the scale................................................................ 16-208
How to use control list selectors..................................................... 16-209
How Enter key handshaking works .................................................................... 16-210
Setting up control list selectors ....................................................... 16-211
Setting up the appearance of the control list selector ...................................... 16-213
Setting up the control list selector’s state values and captions ....................... 16-215
Setting up the control list selector to work with an Enter key ....................... 16-218
Connecting the control list selector to data ....................................................... 16-219
Setting up the Piloted Control List Selector ............................ 16-220
Choosing between piloted control list selectors and control list selectors ... 16-220
How piloted control list selectors work at run time......................................... 16-220
Setting up the appearance of the piloted control list selector......................... 16-225
Setting up the piloted control list selector’s state values and captions.......... 16-227
Setting up the piloted control list selector to work with an Enter key.......... 16-230
Connecting the piloted control list selector to data.......................................... 16-232
Setting up local message displays ................................................. 16-234
Setting up the appearance of the local message display................................... 16-236
Connecting the local message display to data.................................................... 16-238
Setting up macro buttons ...................................................................... 16-238
Contents I
xxiii
Setting up the appearance of the button and the macro to run ..................... 16-240
Setting up a caption or image for the button .................................................... 16-242
Setting up time and date displays .................................................. 16-245
Time and date formats.......................................................................................... 16-245
Setting up the appearance of the time and date display................................... 16-247
Setting up print alarm history buttons ......................................... 16-248
Time and date formats.......................................................................................... 16-249
Setting up the appearance of the button ............................................................ 16-251
Setting up a caption or image for the button .................................................... 16-253
Setting up what appears on the alarm history report ....................................... 16-257
Setting up print alarm status buttons .......................................... 16-258
Setting up the appearance of the button ............................................................ 16-261
Setting up a caption or image for the button .................................................... 16-263
Setting up what appears on the alarm status report ......................................... 16-267
Setting up alarm lists ............................................................................... 16-269
Time and date formats.......................................................................................... 16-270
Setting up the appearance of the alarm list........................................................ 16-272
Setting up what appears in the alarm list............................................................ 16-274
Setting up alarm banners ...................................................................... 16-276
Time and date formats.......................................................................................... 16-277
Setting up the appearance of the banner............................................................ 16-279
Setting up the types of alarms to display............................................................ 16-281
Setting up alarm status lists ............................................................... 16-283
Setting up the appearance of the alarm status list............................................. 16-285
Setting up what appears in the alarm status list ................................................ 16-287
Setting up diagnostics lists ................................................................. 16-289
Setting up the appearance of the diagnostics list .............................................. 16-292
Setting up information message displays ................................. 16-293
Setting up the appearance of the information message display...................... 16-295
xxiv I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Chapter 17
Contents I
xxv
Applying animation to groups............................................................... 17-37
Checking the animation on objects ................................................. 17-37
Changing the animation on objects ................................................. 17-40
Copying or duplicating objects with animation ....................... 17-41
Copying animation without copying objects ............................. 17-41
Chapter 18
xxvi I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Summary of steps.......................................................................................... 18-11
Creating trend objects ............................................................................... 18-12
Setting up trends ........................................................................................... 18-13
Specifying chart style and update mode ............................................................... 18-14
Setting up how the trend works at run time ........................................................ 18-15
Setting up the horizontal axis................................................................................. 18-18
Setting up the vertical axis ...................................................................................... 18-21
Setting up focus highlight and keyboard navigation........................................... 18-24
Specifying the tags and expressions to plot data for .......................................... 18-24
Setting up pens ......................................................................................................... 18-26
After you create the trend ...................................................................... 18-29
Using the Trends graphic library ........................................................ 18-29
Using buttons to control the trend at run time ........................ 18-30
Printing trend data ........................................................................................ 18-32
Improving clarity of the trend printout................................................................ 18-33
Runtime errors for the trend .................................................................. 18-33
Chapter 19
Contents I
xxvii
Creating expressions .................................................................................... 19-7
Cutting, copying, and pasting expressions .................................. 19-8
Formatting expressions .............................................................................. 19-9
Using tag names and tag placeholders ........................................... 19-9
Using tag placeholders instead of tag names....................................................... 19-10
Constants ............................................................................................................ 19-11
Arithmetic operators ................................................................................... 19-11
String operands ........................................................................................................ 19-12
Relational operators .................................................................................... 19-12
How string operands are evaluated....................................................................... 19-13
Logical operators .......................................................................................... 19-13
Bitwise operators .......................................................................................... 19-15
Using the left shift operator ................................................................................... 19-17
Evaluation order of operators............................................................... 19-18
Mathematical functions ............................................................................ 19-20
Security functions ......................................................................................... 19-20
If-then-else ......................................................................................................... 19-21
Nested if-then-else................................................................................................... 19-22
Using write expressions ........................................................................... 19-24
Chapter 20
xxviii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Editing embedded variables .................................................................. 20-11
Deleting embedded variables ............................................................... 20-11
How embedded variables are updated at run time ............... 20-11
How embedded variables are displayed at run time............ 20-12
Numeric embedded variables................................................................................. 20-12
String embedded variables...................................................................................... 20-13
Time and date embedded variables....................................................................... 20-14
Chapter 21
Chapter 22
Contents I
xxix
Controlling display changes remotely .............................................. 22-9
Chapter 23
Chapter 24
xxx I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Using the DeskLock tool .......................................................................... 24-20
Running applications .................................................................................. 24-21
Shutting down applications ................................................................... 24-21
What happens when the application shuts down ............................................... 24-22
Chapter 25
Contents I
xxxi
Copying and deleting application and font files...................... 25-24
Setting up the keyboard, mouse, keypad
and touch screen ......................................................................................... 25-25
Setting up RSLinx Enterprise drivers .............................................. 25-27
Setting up a serial driver.......................................................................................... 25-28
Setting up the DHPlus driver ................................................................................ 25-30
Editing device addresses ........................................................................ 25-31
Setting up serial ports for use
with KEPServerEnterprise communications ............................. 25-32
Specifying print options on the PanelView Plus
or VersaView CE terminal...................................................................... 25-33
Other methods for starting RSView ME Station ...................... 25-35
Using startup parameters with VersaView CE.................................................... 25-37
Starting RSView ME Station when the VersaView CE terminal
is turned on.............................................................................................................. 25-38
Viewing the System Event Log ............................................................ 25-40
Viewing the Terminal Information .................................................... 25-40
Specifying time, date, and number formats ............................... 25-41
Deleting log files on the run-time computer .............................. 25-42
Running a newer version of the application........................................................ 25-42
Deleting log files at application startup ................................................................ 25-43
Running applications .................................................................................. 25-43
Shutting down applications ................................................................... 25-44
What happens when the application shuts down ............................................... 25-44
Chapter 26
xxxii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Setting up a driver for the transfer
on the development computer .............................................................. 26-6
Downloading applications
and Windows True Type fonts ............................................................... 26-6
About the download.................................................................................................. 26-7
Serial downloads ........................................................................................................ 26-7
Uploading applications from the MobileView terminal ...... 26-10
About the upload ..................................................................................................... 26-10
Serial uploads............................................................................................................ 26-11
Comparing applications ............................................................................ 26-14
Contents I
xxxiii
Starting RSView ME Station when the MobileView terminal
is turned on.............................................................................................................. 26-35
Specifying time, date, and number formats ............................... 26-37
Deleting log files on the run-time computer .............................. 26-38
Running a newer version of the application........................................................ 26-38
Deleting log files at application startup ................................................................ 26-38
Running applications............................................................................................... 26-39
Shutting down applications .................................................................................... 26-39
What happens when the application shuts down ............................................... 26-40
Chapter 27
xxxiv I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
What is written to the Value control..................................................................... 27-14
Problems with the string pop-up windows.......................................................... 27-15
Changing tag values .................................................................................... 27-16
Viewing tag data ............................................................................................ 27-19
Viewing alarms and messages ............................................................ 27-22
Viewing information
about run-time communication errors .......................................... 27-22
Appendix A
Contents I
xxxv
Order of precedence ................................................................................................ A-21
Converting PanelBuilder 1400e RIO applications
to RSView ........................................................................................................... A-22
Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tags ......................................................... A-23
Appendix B
Appendix C
xxxvi I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Alarms ........................................................................................................................C-1
Graphics ...................................................................................................................C-1
Time ............................................................................................................................C-2
User .............................................................................................................................C-3
Appendix D
Appendix E
Contents I
xxxvii
Connections collection .............................................................................................E-17
Appendix F
Text you add to your application that is displayed at run time, but cannot be
exported ........................................................................................................................ F-2
Text you add to your application that is not displayed at run time, and cannot be
exported ........................................................................................................................ F-3
xxxviii I
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
P Preface
Thank you for choosing RSView Machine Edition™. RSView Machine
Edition is a member of the RSView Enterprise Series family of
products. It is an integrated package for developing and running
automation applications.
Designed for use with Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP,
PanelView Plus™ terminals, and on VersaView CE™ and MobileView™
terminals running Microsoft Windows CE 3.0, RSView Machine
Edition gives you all the tools you need to create effective machine-
level monitoring and control applications.
The Release Notes are available on the RSView Machine Edition CD-
ROM, as well as from the Help menu in RSView Studio. The User’s
Guide, Installation Guide, and Help are available from the Help menu
in RSView Studio.
Preface ■ P–1
Finding the information you need
You have many options for finding information about how to use
RSView™, or how to solve problems with RSView.
To find the answer, use the table of contents and the index in the User’s
Guide and Help.
You can also perform a full-text search on both the Help and the User’s
Guide. For information about using Help, see Chapter 7, “Getting the
information you need,” in the RSView Machine Edition Installation Guide.
On the Help menu, select Rockwell Software on the Web, and then
click the name of the web page you want to view.
The Rockwell Software Discussion Forums are web pages for users of
Rockwell Software products. The forums offer discussion groups, for
exchanging tips and questions with other RSView users.
If you can’t find the answer to your question using any of the resources
suggested above, contact Rockwell Software Technical Support at:
Telephone: 440-646-5800
Fax: 440-646-5801
http://www.software.rockwell.com or
http://support.rockwellautomation.com
Preface ■
P–3
When you call
You’ll find this number on the Activation disk label and in the
About RSView Studio dialog box available from the Help menu in
RSView.
a description of what happened and what you were doing when the
problem occurred.
1 Getting Started
RSView Machine Edition is software for developing and running
human-machine interface applications. RSView Machine Edition is
designed for monitoring and controlling automated processes and
machines.
To exit RSViewStudio
4. Click Open.
Application
Explorer
Diagnostics
List
Status bar
The toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons for commonly used menu items so you
can have quick access to the items without opening the menu. When
Tooltip
All editors use the Standard toolbar. The Graphic Displays, Graphic
Libraries, User Accounts, and Tags editors have additional toolbars.
The Application tab contains the editors for creating and editing your
application. For more information about the Application Explorer, see
page 2-8.
The workspace
The workspace is the blank area of the RSView Studio window. You
can drag icons from the Application Explorer to the workspace to open
editors and components. For more information, see page 2-8.
You can detach (undock) the Diagnostics List from the main window,
and then move the list anywhere on the screen.
To undock the Diagnostics List, drag the grab bars at the bottom left
of the Diagnostics List. If you can’t see the grab bars, drag the top edge
of the Diagnostics List to make it a bit larger.
To detach the
Diagnostics List, drag
the grab bars.
When the Diagnostics List is undocked, you can make it any size you
want, for example to view more than one message at a time. To resize
the bar, drag an edge or corner until the bar is the size you want.
Workbook tabs
If you select Workbook Mode on the View menu, the workspace
displays tabs at the bottom for each open editor or component.
Workbook Mode allows you to bring forward an open item more
quickly than by using the Window menu.
Workbook tabs
Double-click the title bar to float the explorer in the middle of the
main window, then drag it to a new position.
Locating editors
The editors are grouped in folders in the Application Explorer (see the
illustration on page 2-9). Each editor is displayed with an icon to the
left of the editor name.
Click the + symbol to the left of the folder icon, or double-click the
folder name.
Graphic Displays
Graphic Libraries
Parameters
Local Messages
Information Messages
Macros
The Application Explorer lists the components you create under the
icon for the editor you used to create the component.
You can use the Images editor to copy bitmap images into your
application (but not to create new images). Each image you copy is
listed as a component under the editor.
Click the + symbol to the left of the editor icon, or double-click the
editor name.
Opening editors
To open an editor
To close an editor
Click the close button on the editor’s title bar, or on the File menu
click Close.
Some editors have an OK, Cancel, or Close button that you can
click to close the editor.
User Accounts
Global Connections
Local Messages
Alarm Setup
Information Setup
Information Messages
Macros
In the Graphic Displays editor, many of the Properties dialog boxes for
setting up graphic objects contain spreadsheets for assigning tags or
expressions to the objects.
Click the cell, and then type the information. If the cell already
contains text, the new information is added after the current text.
In the Property Panel, double-click the cell and then type the
information. If the cell already contains text, double-clicking
highlights the text and typing replaces the highlighted text.
Creating components
On the File menu, select New, and then click the type of component
to create.
Opening components
Saving components
The Save tool is available when the active component contains unsaved
changes.
Save tool
To save a component
2. If this is the first time you’re saving the component, type a name in
the Component name box, and then click OK.
Closing components
To close a component
On the File menu, click Close, or click the Close button on the
Close button on the bar
component’s title bar.
Some components have a Close button that you can click to close
Close button in the component.
component
Before the component closes you are prompted to save unsaved
changes, if there are any.
For example, if you want to use the same graphic display in Application
A and Application B, create the display in Application A, then add the
graphic display component from Application A to Application B.
When you add the component into Application B, changes you make
to the component in Application B are not reflected in the component
in Application A.
4. Click Open. The components are listed under the editor in the
Application Explorer in Application B.
If you later modify the component in Application A, you can add the
component into Application B again using the same steps as described
above.
Deleting components
Deleting a component deletes it from the Application Explorer and
from the hard disk.
To delete a component
Removing components
You can remove a component from the Application Explorer but leave
it on the hard disk, in case you want to use the component in another
application.
To remove a component
To rename a component
3. Click OK.
Duplicating components
The Duplicate option is useful for creating multiple similar
components. For example, you could create a graphic display to use as
a template, then duplicate the display each time you want to use the
template.
To duplicate a component
3. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
Selecting a printer
You must install a printer before you can select it. For information
about installing a printer, see your Windows documentation.
2. If you don’t want to use the default printer, specify another printer.
4. Click OK.
3 Planning applications
A well-designed application requires planning. To help you plan, this
chapter describes:
collecting data.
planning alarms.
using trends.
RSView comes with several sample applications that can give you
guidance when planning your application. For instructions on opening
the sample applications, see page 2-2.
To gather information:
Talk to machine operators and other experts who are going to use
the system. Find out what information they need to optimize
machine operations and processes.
Collecting data
When planning data collection, design your system so only essential
data is collected. Limiting data collection is important because
collection activities require substantial processing power and generate
a lot of traffic on the network.
If you are going to use direct referencing for all your tags, you don’t
need to create HMI tags in RSView. For information about creating
direct references to data server tags, see Chapter 6.
Organizing tags
Before creating tags:
Group tags in the way that makes most sense for your application.
For example, group all similar devices or group related areas of the
plant floor.
When creating tags, place related tags into folders. For greater
organization, nest folders.
When planning displays, determine the best way for users to navigate
through your displays and develop a template to establish a common
look and feel for your displays.
Also consider factors about the run-time terminal that affect how the
application is displayed and used, such as:
screen size.
Planning applications ■
3–3
whether the operator will be using a keyboard, touch screen, mouse,
or combination of navigation and data entry methods.
a title.
navigational buttons.
Consistency
When you design several displays, place the same kinds of buttons
in the same positions. For example, if you have a Start button in a
certain position in one display, don’t put a Stop button in the same
position in the next display.
Clarity
Use symbols that are easily recognizable. For example, use the
conventional ISA symbols for tanks and valves.
Some people are color blind to red and green so don’t rely on color
alone to establish meaning.
Planning applications ■
3–5
Usability
If you’re designing for a touch screen, don’t place important buttons
where they’ll be blocked by an On Top display. The user can’t press
a covered button. Also, ensure the button is large enough for users
to touch easily.
Keep the intended user in mind and design displays so they are easy
to understand and use. Ask the users to test the displays.
Planning alarms
For information about setting up local messages, see page 14-40. For
information about setting up information messages, see Chapter 12.
Diagnostics messages
Set up diagnostics messages to notify the operator of system activity
such as tag reads and writes, communication problems, running
macros, or problems opening displays.
Using trends
When planning trends, consider how they will be used. For example,
will the trend be used to:
For information about setting up data logging, see Chapter 11. For
information about creating trend graphic objects, see Chapter 18.
Planning applications ■
3–7
Designing a secure system
When deciding on your security requirements, consider whether to:
4 Working with
applications
This chapter describes:
application files.
What is an application?
An application is the software application you create in RSView Studio
to monitor and control your plant processes. An application consists of
one or more data servers and an HMI project (also known as an HMI
server). The data servers provide communications for the project. The
project or HMI server consists of graphic displays, alarm information,
user information, and other settings.
or
Component files
Component files are located in folders in the HMI project folder, as
described in the following table. For example, graphic display
component files (with the extension .gfx) are stored in the Gfx folder.
You might need to navigate to the location of these files, for example
External folders
The following table lists some RSView folders that are external to the
HMI project folder, and the types of files they contain.
You can also store data log files in a different location on the run-time
computer, on a networked computer, or on a PC card. For more
information, see Chapter 11.
Creating applications
You can create a new application when you start RSView Studio, or
once RSView Studio is already open.
2. In the New tab, in the Application name box, type a name for your
application, up to 32 characters long.
3. Click Create.
RSView Studio creates the application’s folders and files, and then
displays the new application in the Application Explorer.
Importing applications
You can import RSView Machine Edition, PanelBuilder,
PanelBuilder32 and PanelBuilder 1400e applications into RSView
Studio.
If the application you are importing contains any direct driver nodes,
the import wizard will create one RSLinx topic for each direct driver
node it finds. All topics are then converted into device shortcuts, to run
with RSLinx Enterprise. You must have both RSLinx for RSView and
RSLinx Enterprise installed to make this two-step conversion.
3. Start RSWho and select each device associated with each Direct
Driver Node (e.g., 131.200.13.128)
If these steps are not done in this order, the topics generated by the
import code will be invalid and will need to be fixed using the Topic
Editor in RSLinx.
2. In the New tab, in the Application name box, type a name for your
application, up to 32 characters long.
Opening applications
You can open an application when you start RSView Studio, or once
RSView Studio is already open.
2. Click the Existing tab, and then click the application to open.
3. Click Open.
On the File menu, select Recent Applications, and then click the
name of the application to open.
Closing applications
To close an application
Click the Close button at the right end of the RSView Studio title
bar.
Close button
If there are any unsaved changes in open editors, RSView Studio
asks you whether to save the changes before closing them.
rename applications.
copy applications.
delete applications.
restore a legacy project backup file (with the file extension .mea)
from an earlier release of RSView Studio, and convert it to Version
3.0.
For details about using the tool, see the tool’s Help.
Since project settings affect how your graphic displays look, specify the
settings before creating graphic displays.
Screen resolution
(1024 x 728 pixels)
The project window size is used for all graphic displays of the Replace
type. If you decrease the window size after you have already created
graphic displays, Replace displays are resized, but any objects in the
displays remain the same size and in the same position as before. On
Top displays are not resized.
Title bar
If you select this option, a title bar is used for all Replace graphic
displays. For information about graphic display types, see page 14-14.
If desired, you can also use a Control box, Minimize button, and Close
button on the title bar. The Close button appears only if you select the
Control box in the Project Settings editor.
If you plan to set up security for your application and want to prevent
unauthorized users from stopping the application, do not use a title bar.
For On Top displays, you can specify a different name to use in the title
bar. Use the Display Settings dialog box to specify the name (for details,
see page 14-16).
Title bar Check this box to display the name of the application (or
other title) in a title bar at the top of the window. Type the title in
the box below the check box.
Control menu Control box Check this box to display a Control box at the left end
of the title bar. The user can click the Control box to display the
If you select this option, a Close button appears at the right end of
the title bar.
This option is available only if you select Title bar and Control box.
Project window position Type the number of pixels from the top
left corner of the screen to position the window. If the project
window occupies the whole screen, accept the default values of 0.
Enable auto logout Check this box if you want the current user
to be logged out automatically if the terminal is inactive for a
specified period of time.
Inactivity period Type the length of time the terminal must be
inactive before the current user is automatically logged out and the
default user is logged in.
application name
You can use the Application Explorer to view this information about
your project or HMI server:
application name
5 Setting up
communications
This chapter describes:
OPC communications
OPC servers provide a way for RSView to retrieve tag values from:
1. Gather information about your network, and the devices that are
connected to it. You will need this information to set up RSLinx
Enterprise, RSLinx for RSView, or another OPC server.
3. If you want to use RSLinx for RSView as the OPC server that
enables communications on your network, set up RSLinx for
RSView on the development computer. RSLinx for RSView is
included on the RSView Machine Edition CD-ROM. For details,
see Getting Results with RSLinx, or see Help for RSLinx.
4. If you want to use an OPC server other than RSLinx for RSView
to enable communications on your network, set up the OPC server
on the development computer. For details, see the documentation
supplied with your OPC server.
6. If you want to use HMI tags in your application, open the Tags
editor, and then create device tags that point to addresses in
devices. For details about creating HMI tags, see Chapter 7.
If you do not want to use HMI tags, but instead want to reference
addresses in devices directly, skip this step.
Setting up communications ■
5–3
only one data server, and then you can access each controller using
a different RSLinx Enterprise device shortcut or RSLinx topic.
balance the memory load for tag values. If the computer on which
a data server is running runs out of memory, you could create
another data server on another computer to provide more memory
for tag values.
You can create OPC data servers for your application. For example,
you might want to use an RSLinx Enterprise data server and a
KEPServerEnterprise data server.
Use an RSLinx Enterprise data server when you want to use RSLinx
Enterprise communications. For details about setting up
communications in RSLinx Enterprise, see Help for RSLinx
Enterprise.
4. Click Finish.
Setting up communications ■
5–5
the run-time terminal with the application and can be used with the
application at run time.
The same shortcut names are used in both instances, but they can
be configured to refer to different devices.
Right-click the application root, point to New Data Server, and then
click OPC.
2. In the dialog box, fill in the options in each tab, as described in the
sections that follow. When you are finished, click OK.
Setting up communications ■
5–7
Specifying the OPC server
In the General tab, type a description for the data server, and specify
where the server is located and the name of the OPC server.
Name Type a name for the data server. The name of the data server
cannot include hyphens (-).
Description Type a description for the data server. For example, use
this box to describe the server’s location, or to identify a contact person
or number in the event of failure.
Computer hosting the server Specify whether the server will be
hosted on the local computer (the computer your application will run
on at run time) or a remote computer. To browse for the name of a
remote computer, click Browse.
If you want to use RSLinx for RSView as the OPC server, and RSLinx
for RSView is installed on the same computer as RSView ME Station,
click RSLinx OPC Server.
Setting up communications ■
5–9
Include extended information in the server cache file Check this
box if you want to view additional information about tags, such as their
data types, when you are not connected to the data server.
Create cache Click this button to create the data server cache file.
For information about updating the data server cache, see the next
section.
Setting up communications ■
5–11
3. Click Synchronize.
4. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
types of tags.
Types of tags
RSView conforms to the OPC™ Data Access (DA) 2.0 specification for
information exchange among automation or control applications, field
systems or devices, and business or office applications.
HMI tags
To use a data server tag, you can use an existing tag in the processor
(for example, a programmable controller), or you can create a new
one in the processor or OPC server. For example, in a ControlLogix
processor, you could create the tag using your RSLogix 5000
programming software.
To use an HMI tag, you must first create it in the Tags editor. For
details, see Chapter 7.
2. Browse for, or type, the name of the tag anywhere you want to
connect an object to data at run time.
If you don’t know the names of tags, you can browse for them. You can
browse while online and connected to a device, or you can browse for
tags from an offline file, for example a ControlLogix program file.
To browse for tags, use the Tag Browser. For details, see page 6-10.
You can type the name of a tag that doesn’t yet exist. If you do this,
ensure that you spell every instance of the tag name consistently, and
that you when you do create the tag, you spell it the same way you did
when you referred to it.
For some of the things you might need to do in your application, you
might not need to create HMI tags. Use direct references to tags located
in devices instead, for example, tags located in an OPC server’s
database.
Eliminating duplication
Using data server tags allows you to add, modify, or delete tags in a
device without having to duplicate the changes in the RSView HMI tag
database.
Referencing tag values directly eliminates the need for creating an HMI
tag for each member.
Use HMI tags to manipulate tag data and to store tag values in the run-
time computer’s memory.
The scale and offset modify the “raw data” that comes from and goes
to the programmable controller before the data is saved in the
computer’s memory (called the value table). The scale and offset also
modify the value specified in RSView before it is written to the
programmable controller.
HMI tags allow you to set a minimum and maximum value that can be
written to the programmable controller or server.
For more information about minimum and maximum, and scale and
offset, see page 7-21.
A memory tag can be used to store values without the need for an
attached or accessible device.
1. In the Tags editor in RSView, create a tag and map the tag name to
an OPC tag or device address.
The Tag Browser has two modes: one for selecting a single tag, and one
for selecting multiple tags. Depending on whether a single tag or
multiple tags are expected, when you click the Browse button the
single-selection Tag Browser opens, as shown above, or the multiple-
selection Tag Browser opens, as shown on page 6-16.
The Tag Browser for multiple selections allows you to add tags to a list,
and then edit the list before you click OK.
select tags.
In RSLinx Enterprise, you can use the Offline folder to browse tags in
a RSLogix.acd file. For details about making the .acd file available to
browse offline, see RSLinx Enterprise Help.
In RSLinx for RSView, you can use the Offline folder to browse tags
in a PLC program stored on disk. If the OPC topic in RSLinx for
RSView has access to symbols, you can browse for them in the Offline
folder. For details about adding symbols to the OPC topic in RSLinx
for RSView, see RSLinx for RSView Help.
Root folder
Folders pane
Tags pane
The parts of the Tag Browser are described on the pages that follow.
The other folders show the names of HMI tag folders and folders
of data server tags. For example, RSLinx for RSView tags are in a
folder with the name of the RSLinx for RSView topic.
Right-click a blank area of the folders pane and then click Show
Server Names.
The folders list with server The folders list with server
names hidden. names shown.
In the example on the right, there are two data servers, named
KepServer and RSLinxServer. Folders of data server tags are listed
under the data server to which they belong. Below the data servers, the
application is listed as an HMI server, with folders of HMI tags under
the application name.
To create a folder
1. If server names are not visible, right-click the Folders pane, and
then click Show Server Names.
2. Right-click the application name, and then click New HMI Tag
Folder.
4. Click OK.
If you have the Tag Browser open, and you add a tag, the new tag does
not appear in the Tag Browser automatically.
Right-click a folder in the Folders list, and then click Refresh All
Folders.
Displaying tags
To display tags
Click a folder.
Any tags in the folder appear in the right pane of the Tag Browser. If
multiple servers use the same tag name, the server name automatically
appears with the tag name.
Right-click a blank area of the right pane, and then click Show
Description.
Selecting tags
To select tags, do one of the following
To select consecutive tags, click the first tag, press and hold down
the Shift key, click the last tag, and then click OK.
To select tags that are not consecutive, click the first tag, press and
hold down the Ctrl key, and then click each tag. When you are
finished selecting tags, click OK.
1. Click the folder that contains the tags you want to add to the list.
Click Clear.
Type the pattern in the Tag Filter box, and then press Enter.
Tags that match the pattern are displayed in the right pane.
For information about creating and editing HMI tags, see Chapter 7.
For information about importing tags from a PLC database, see
page 7-33.
Expressions
Global Connections
Graphic Displays
Parameters
Alarm Setup
Information Setup
Macros
Type the tag name here... ...or click the Browse button to open the
Tag Browser.
In the Tag column, click the Browse button and then select a tag
from the Tag Browser.
For information about using the Tag Browser, see page 6-10.
You can use up to 1,000 tags per graphic display. This limit includes the
tags contained in embedded variables.
Type the tag name here... ...or click the Browse button to open the
Tag Browser.
Type the tag name here... ...or click the Browse button to open the
Tag Browser.
In the Exprn column, click the Browse button, and then create an
expression in the Expression editor. Use this method if you want to
check the expression syntax.
For information about the data types available for analog tags, see
page 7-23.
This rounding method is also used for numeric input enable buttons
that use the implicit decimal position, if an integer tag is assigned to the
button’s Value control. For more information about the numeric input
enable button, see page 16-109.
Data sources
When creating an HMI tag, you must specify a data source. The data
source determines whether the tag receives its values externally or
internally.
Device
A tag with device as its data source receives its data from a source
external to RSView. The data can come from a programmable
controller or other device via RSLinx Enterprise, or from another OPC
server. You can use up to 5,000 device tags.
For analog tags with Device as the data source, the data type
determines the format used when reading and writing tag data to the
data server.
Memory
A tag with memory as its data source receives its data from (and stores
values in) the RSView internal value table. Tags with memory as the
data source do not count toward the total tag limit.
For analog tags with Memory as the data source, select the data type
that matches the format of the data you will store in the tag. Choosing
Default is the same as choosing Floating Point.
Organizing tags makes finding and using tags faster and simpler. To
organize your tags, try these tips:
Naming tags
A to Z
0 to 9
Tag names cannot contain spaces. The tag name can be mixed case. Tag
names preserve upper and lower case for readability but are not case
sensitive. For example, the tag name MixerValve1 is the same as
mixervalve1.
When a tag name starts with a number or contains a dash, enclose the
name in braces { } when you use it in an expression, for example,
{N33-0}. For more information about using tags in expressions see
Chapter 14.
To organize tags, create a folder to store tags that are related to one
another. To separate the folder name from the rest of the tag name, use
a backslash (\). For example, tags in the folder called Pump would start
with Pump\.
For greater organization, you can nest folders. For example, you can
organize the HMI tag database first by area, then by machines in the
To create similar groups of tags quickly, create one folder with its tags
and then duplicate the folder.
The Tags editor has these parts: form area, query box, folder hierarchy,
and spreadsheet area.
Form area
Query box
Folder
hierarchy
For information about creating tags in other editors, see page 7-28.
For example, to search for all the tags that contain the string “pump”
in their name, type *pump* in the Search For box. When you press
Enter, a list of tags containing the string “pump” appears in the
spreadsheet.
create folders.
open folders.
nest folders.
duplicate folders.
delete folders.
You can nest folders. If a folder has a plus (+) sign, it contains one or
more folders. If a folder is blank, it does not contain any other folders.
This folder contains one or more folders.
1. Place the cursor over the right border of the box until it changes to
a double arrow.
To create a folder
1. On the Edit menu, click New Folder, or click the Create Folder
tool.
Create Folder
3. Click OK.
Opening folders
When you open a folder, its contents are displayed in the spreadsheet.
To open a folder
2. Press Enter.
Once you have created a folder, you can create tags in it.
2. After the backslash (\), type the new tag name, up to 255
characters long including folder name.
For information about setting up tags once you’ve created them, see
page 7-21.
Nesting folders
2. On the Edit menu, click New Folder, or click the Create Folder
Create Folder
tool.
4. Click OK.
When you nest folders, remember that the backslash in a folder name
counts as one character in the tag name.
Duplicating folders
When you duplicate a folder, all the tags in the folder are duplicated and
automatically given the new folder name. If the folder contains folders,
those folders are also duplicated.
Duplicate Tag Folder 2. On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Folder, or click the Duplicate
Tag Folder tool.
4. Click OK.
Deleting folders
To delete folders
Delete folder 2. On the Edit menu, click Delete Folder, or click the Delete Folder
tool.
view tags.
create tags.
edit tags.
duplicate tags.
Use the query box or folder hierarchy to select the tags you want to
view.
To select a row, click anywhere in the row or click the row number.
1. Place the cursor over the division between the column or row, in
the top or side border, until it changes to a double arrow.
Creating tags
To create a tag inside a folder, first open the folder. For details, see
page 7-13.
For information about setting up tags once you’ve created them, see
page 7-21.
Duplicating tags
To duplicate a tag
2. On the Edit menu, click Duplicate, or click the Duplicate Tag tool.
Duplicate A new row is inserted below the highlighted row. The new row
contains all the same information except the tag name.
3. In the form area, in the Name box, type the name for the new tag,
up to 255 characters long including folder name.
4. Click Accept.
Editing tags
You can edit all parts of a tag except the tag name and tag type.
To edit a tag
Delete tags carefully. Once you click the Delete button, the tag is
deleted. There is no confirmation message and you cannot undo the
deletion.
To delete a tag
2. On the Edit menu, click Delete, or click the Delete tool, or press
the Delete key on your keyboard.
Delete
For device tags, you must provide the address and path to the OPC
server that is connected to the data source. For example, the OPC
server could be connected to a device such as a programmable
controller.
[AccessPath]Address
or
::[AccessPath]Address
For communications with other OPC servers, the access path might
be optional. For information about the syntax for the access path,
see your OPC server documentation.
We recommend that you use the Tag Browser to select OPC items.
When you use the Tag Browser the correct syntax and data types are
selected automatically.
This example shows you how to specify the OPC topic, item name, and
bit level of an item that uses the integer data type in a ControlLogix
processor.
In this example, the RSLinx Enterprise Device Shortcut name for the
ControlLogix processor is CLGX. To connect to an OPC item called
Motor, type this address:
You can access the bit level of an item that uses the integer data type by
appending .# to the end of the tag address, where # is the number of
the bit to access.
For example, to access the first bit of the integer item Motor, type this
address:
[CLGX]Motor.0
Numeric values that require a decimal must use the decimal point (.) as
the decimal symbol, regardless of which decimal symbol is specified in
Regional Options in the Windows Control Panel (Regional and
Language Options if you use Windows XP).
The range between the minimum and maximum values cannot exceed
the maximum floating-point value (3.402823E38).
Scale and Offset Type a number. For the scale, do not use 0. To
disable the scale, type 1. To disable the offset, type 0.
IM PO RT AN T Values from the data source are first scaled and then
added to the offset. When a value is written to the data
source, the process is reversed: the offset is subtracted
and the scale is used for division. This ensures that the
correct, unchanged value is sent to the data source.
Data Type For tags with Device as the data source, select the data type
that matches the format of the data stored in the programmable
controller or Windows application.
For tags with Memory as the data source, select the data type that
matches the format of the data you will store in the tag.
The following topics describe how to fill in the boxes in the Data
Source section of the form. For details about filling in the boxes in the
Tag section of the form, see page 7-21.
A tag with device as its data source receives its data from a source
external to RSView. The data can come from:
1. Click Device.
2. In the Address box, specify the address of the OPC item (data
server tag) in the OPC server. The item syntax depends on the
OPC server. The maximum length is 255 characters.
To browse for the OPC item, click the Browse button beside the
Address box.
Browse button
For more information about OPC addressing syntax, see page 7-20.
1. Click Memory.
The first time you start the application, the value defined in the
Initial Value box is assigned to the memory tag.
You can also use macros to assign values to tags. For information
about macros, see Chapter 21.
3. To retain the most recent value when the application is shut down
and restarted, check Retentive.
If you do not check this box, the Initial Value is used when the
application is restarted.
Type a new tag name in the “Tag or expression” column. Keep track
Browse button in the tag
column of the tag name, and add the tag in the Tags editor when convenient.
Click the Browse button beside the “Tags to add” box to open the
Tag Browser and create the tag, as described in the next section.
Browse button in the Data
Log Models editor Type a new tag name in the “Tags to add” box, and then click Add.
You are warned that the tag does not exist. Click Yes to add the tag
to the list of tags in the datalog model. Keep track of the tag name,
and add the tag in the Tags editor when convenient.
select a single tag or multiple tags. The ability to select multiple tags
depends on which tag browser you have opened. In the figure
above, only a single tag could be selected.
For information about using the Tag Browser to select tags and create
folders for tags, see Chapter 6. For information about using the Tag
Browser to import tags from a PLC or SLC database, see the next
section.
1. Right-click the right pane and then click New HMI Tag.
In the Tag Browser, right-click the right pane, and then click Import
PLC Tags.
DB Browser button in
In the Tags editor, on the Edit menu click Other Databases, or click
the Tags editor the DB Browser tool.
Use the Import PLC Tags dialog box to selectively import tags from a
PLC or other database into your application’s HMI tag database. Tags
imported in this way are copied into the database-they are not shared
with the source database. This means changes to tags in your
application do not affect the database from which they have been
imported and vice versa.
1. In the Import Tags into Folder box, type a folder name if you want
the tags to be in a folder. If the folder does not already exist in the
application’s HMI tag database, it is created.
2. In the RSLinx Topic box, type the name of the RSLinx for RSView
topic to use for the tags, or the name of the RSLinx Enterprise
device shortcut. The tags will be copied into this topic, and each
tag’s address in the HMI tag database will contain the name of the
topic.
The addresses and symbols from the selected database are displayed
in the box below the Filter box.
4. To filter the tag list so that only certain addresses or symbols are
displayed, in the Filter box type a character string, and then click
Search.
6. Click OK.
The selected tags are added to the HMI tag database for the current
application and displayed in the Tag Browser, in the folder for the
specified RSLinx for RSView topic. If you have already imported a
particular tag, you are prompted to change its name if you want to
import it again.
merge tags from another RSView application (that is, import them
directly from the application, without first creating a tag .csv file).
In RSView Studio, on the Tools menu, click Tag Import and Export
Wizard.
For details about using the wizard, see the wizard’s Help.
8 Setting up global
connections
This chapter describes:
changing displays.
printing displays.
running macros.
change the display on the run-time terminal remotely (from the data
source).
update the date and time on the run-time terminal using the data
source date and time.
Changing displays
Use these global connections to monitor and control display changes:
For detailed information about using the data source to control display
changes, see page 8-6.
Printing displays
Use these global connections to monitor and control display printing:
When the data source or the operator prints a display, everything on the
screen is printed, including the current display, pop-up windows, and
any visible background applications. The display is printed in gray-
scale, even if you use a color printer.
Normally you would assign only one set of date and time controls,
either to update the date and time at the data source from the terminal,
or to update the terminal’s internal clock from the data source.
The values of assigned date and time controls are updated in the order
in which the controls are listed in the Global Connections editor.
To update the date or time at the data source from the terminal’s
internal clock, assign an analog tag to one or more of these controls:
Year 00-99
Day of Week 1-7, with 1 being Sunday
Month 1-12
Day of Month 1-31
Hour 1-23
Minute 0-59
Second 0-59
Updating the date and time at the terminal from the data
source
To update the date or time in the terminal’s internal clock from the data
source, assign an analog or digital tag or an expression to the Remote
Date and Time control. Assign an analog tag or an expression to one
or more of these controls:
When the Remote Date and Time control value changes from 0 to a
non-zero value, the terminal resets its internal time and date to the time
and date read from the individual remote date and time controls.
The date and time are updated at the rate specified in the “Maximum
update rate” box.
During run time, the application reads the value at the data source and
sets the backlight to a percentage of its maximum intensity
corresponding to the value. For instance, if the value of the connection
is 25, the backlight will be set to 25% of its maximum intensity. This
value will override the terminal’s own backlight intensity setting.
If the value of the connection is greater than 100, the backlight will be
set to its maximum intensity. If the value is less than 0, the backlight is
set to its minimum value, that is, it will be turned off.
Create the macros in the Macros editor. Make sure you name them
exactly as shown in the table above (with no space in the name).
The data source can control display changes for Replace displays only.
You can set up the data source to control all Replace display changes,
or to open displays under set conditions, allowing the operator to
change displays the rest of the time.
This method is useful if you want to allow users to log out from
multiple locations (graphic displays) in the application. However, if you
use the Remote Display Number control for this purpose, you cannot
use it to control other display changes remotely.
Date and time output interval Type the frequency with which to
update date and time values from the terminal to the data source.
Tag values for the Remote controls are also updated when the
application is started.
Although this is the update rate for the tags, this rate does not
update the terminal’s internal clock. Updating the clock is only
triggered by the Remote Date and Time control.
3. To send values from the application to the data source, assign tags
to the following controls.
This option applies to Replace displays only. Make sure that each
display has its own unique number.
Display Print Active Assign a digital tag to this control to notify
the data source when a display is printing. RSView writes 1 to this
control when printing begins, and 0 when RSView is finished
printing. When the value changes to 0 the printer could still be
printing buffered data.
Year RSView sends the value corresponding to the year in the
terminal’s internal clock to this control.
Day of Week RSView sends the value corresponding to the day of
the week to this control.
Month RSView sends the value corresponding to the month to this
control.
Day of Month RSView sends the value corresponding to the day of
the month to this control.
Hour RSView sends the value corresponding to the hour to this
control.
This option applies to Replace displays only. Make sure that each
display has its own unique number.
For more information about remote display changes, see page 8-7.
Remote Display Print Assign this control to allow the data source
to trigger the printing of graphic displays. When the value of the
Disable the screen saver on the run-time terminal if you assign this
control.
Remote Date and Time RSView monitors this control and, when
the value changes from 0 to a non-zero value, updates the terminal’s
internal clock with the values in the remote date and time controls
(listed next).
9 Setting up alarms
This chapter describes:
how the alarm list, alarm banner, and alarm status list work.
Before setting up alarms, you must set up data server or HMI tags
corresponding to the addresses at the data source that will store the
values you want to monitor for alarm conditions. You can monitor
analog and digital tags for alarm conditions. You cannot monitor string
tags.
For information about setting up data server tags, see your OPC data
server documentation. For information about creating HMI tags, see
Chapter 7.
Once you have identified the processes you want to monitor for alarms,
and the tags or expressions that will store the values representing the
status of the processes, you must determine the acceptable range of
values for each tag or expression. Then you can set up alarms to notify
the operator when a value is outside the normal operating range.
Setting up alarms ■
9–3
You can export the alarm setup information, and then import the same
configuration to another RSView application, and then modify it to suit
your requirements.
You can use the Alarm XML Import to import an alarm setup that has
been created using an external programming tool or editor, or you can
import an XML file.
For more information about importing and exporting alarm setup files,
see Appendix E.
You can use any combination of these methods to notify the operator
that an alarm condition has occurred:
To use these methods, select the Display, Audio, Print, and Message to
Tag options when you create your messages, as described on page 9-34.
Setting up alarms ■
9–5
By default, the [ALARM] graphic display opens automatically at run
time when an alarm is generated.
You can accept the default, edit the [ALARM] display, use one of the
other alarm displays, or create your own display. If you elect not to
automatically open a graphic display for alarm notification, an
alternative is to provide the operator with a way to open an alarm
display when desired.
Responding to alarms
Depending on which alarm objects you set up, the operator can:
sort alarms.
For information about the alarm button graphic objects the operator
can use to work with alarms, see page 9-53.
the operator selects an alarm in the alarm list and presses the
acknowledge alarm button, an enter button object, or the Enter key
on an external keyboard or keypad.
the alarm banner has focus and the operator presses the
acknowledge alarm button, an enter button object, or the Enter key
on an external keyboard or keypad.
Setting up alarms ■
9–7
the Remote Ack All control’s value changes to a new non-zero
value.
All alarms are deleted from the alarm log file and cleared from all alarm
lists and alarm banners when the operator presses the clear alarm
history button.
The alarm in the alarm banner is cleared when the operator presses the
clear alarm banner button. It is not deleted from the alarm log file.
When the operator presses the sort alarms button, the sort order
toggles from time to trigger value or from trigger value to time. The
sort order applies to all alarms in all alarm lists and in the alarm log file.
Resetting alarms affects how alarms are displayed in the alarm status
list. When alarms are reset:
the number of times the alarm has been triggered is reset to 0. If the
alarm is still active, the number changes to 1.
the date and time are sent to the system tag AlarmResetDateAnd
TimeString.
Setting up alarms ■
9–9
For each message, the log file records the time the alarm was triggered
and the time the alarm was acknowledged (if it was acknowledged).
The log file is saved every 30 seconds, if there are new alarms. The log
file is also saved when the application is shut down.
The alarm log file is also referred to as the alarm history. For example,
the operator presses the clear alarm history button to remove all alarms
from the log file.
The alarm log file is retained when you restart an application after a
shutdown or power loss. You can delete the log file from the run-time
computer at application startup. For information about deleting the log
file, see page 25-42.
using the print alarm history button. When the operator presses the
button, a report is printed of the contents of the alarm log file. The
report can include the time alarms occurred and were
acknowledged.
using the print alarm status button. When the operator presses the
button, a report is printed of the status of all alarms that have been
set up in the Alarm Setup editor. The report can include how many
times each alarm was triggered, and the accumulated time in alarm.
For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for
Windows 2000 or Windows XP applications, see page 24-11. For
information about the type of printer to use with a PanelView Plus or
Windows CE terminal, see page 25-3.
If you use an analog tag or an expression, you can use any non-zero
integer or floating-point value to trigger an alarm. Floating-point values
are rounded to the nearest integer. For information about how values
are rounded, see page 7-3.
Trigger values cannot be 0. Digital tags have two possible values, 0 and
1. Therefore, if you use a digital tag you can only use the value 1 to
trigger a message. If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different
messages, create an expression that adds 1 to the digital tag’s value. That
way, you can use the trigger values 1 and 2.
Setting up alarms ■
9–11
1. Create an alarm trigger for the analog tag Acid_tank_level. This tag
points to an address in a programmable controller that is linked to
a sensor in the tank. The tag’s minimum value is 0 and its
maximum value is 100.
then 1
then 2
else 0
3. Specify these trigger values and alarm messages for the alarm
trigger:
This diagram shows the bit addresses and bit positions for the array tag:
The tag is currently generating alarms at bit positions 2, 6, 12, 21, 22,
26, and 30.
1. Create an alarm trigger for the array tag. Use the Bit trigger type.
You must use a direct reference for the array tag. The tag uses the
integer data type (16 bits per element). Append L2 to the tag’s
Setting up alarms ■
9–13
starting address to indicate that the trigger will monitor 2 tag
elements (32 bits), as follows:
::[PLC5]N7:0,L2
2. Specify trigger values and alarm messages for the alarm trigger.
Each trigger value corresponds to a bit position (not a bit address).
Use the Least Significant Bit trigger type to generate alarm messages
based on a priority sequence that is determined by bit position. You can
assign an array tag (consisting of up to 1,024 bits) to the trigger control.
When multiple bits in the array change from 0 to 1, only the alarm with
the lowest bit position is generated.
This example shows how to use the Least Significant Bit trigger type to
prioritize which alarm is generated when multiple alarm conditions
occur.
If power to the motor is lost, the manual stop and overload switch also
lose power, generating alarms for all three motor parts. The only alarm
the operator needs to see is the alarm for the motor, since the cause of
the alarm is power loss to the motor, not a problem with the other two
motor parts.
Setting up alarms ■
9–15
1. Create an alarm trigger for the tag Motor_starter. The tag uses 16
bits, and points to the programmable controller address N7:61,
although only the first three bit positions are used in this example.
Use the LSBit (Least Significant Bit) trigger type.
Because you are using only the first three bits in a single tag element,
there is no need to specify a length for the array tag in this example.
You can use a simple tag type.
However, if you were also monitoring bits in N7:62, you would need
to add L2 to the address, as follows:
::[PLC5]N7:61,L2
2. Specify these trigger values and alarm messages for the alarm
trigger:
Character 8
Byte 8
Short Integer 16
Word 16
Integer 32
Double Word 32
The right column shows the number of bits for each data type. This is
useful for helping to determine how many data elements to address to
achieve the required number of bits. To create an array tag, specify how
many elements to use, beginning with the first element at the tag’s
address.
For example, if you want to monitor 128 bit positions for an alarm
trigger, and you are using the Integer data type, you would append the
modifier [4] to the tag name (because 4 x 32 = 128). For detailed
information about tag syntax, see page 9-19.
You cannot use digital or string tags for array tags. You must use a
direct reference for array tags
Setting up alarms ■
9–17
HMI tags (created in RSView)
When creating array tags, you can use analog HMI tags with these data
types:
Byte 8
Unsigned Integer 16
Integer 16
3-Digit BCD 16
4-Digit BCD 16
Long Integer 32
You can view a tag’s data type in the Tag Browser, as described on
page 6-10. All of the HMI tag data types described in the previous table
are displayed with the Item Canonical Data Type of Integer.
When creating array tags, you can use PLC and SLC tags with this data
type:
Short Integer 16
Data server tags with the Short Integer data type are displayed in the
Tag Browser with the Item Canonical Data Type of Integer.
When creating array tags, you can use ControlLogix tags with these
data types:
SINT 8
INT 16
DINT 32
Data server tags with the data types described in the previous table are
displayed in the Tag Browser with the Item Canonical Data Types of
Character, Short Integer, and Long Integer, respectively.
To create an RSLinx Enterprise array tag, use this syntax to specify the
length of the array:
tagname,Larraylength
The tag N7:0 uses the Short Integer data type (16 bits), so the array tag
consists of 80 bits (16 x 5).
When the tag contains a colon (:), put two colons before the RSLinx
Enterprise device shortcut name.
tagname [arraylength]
Setting up alarms ■
9–19
The tag Tag1 uses the Integer data type (32 bits), so the array tag
consists of 96 bits (32 x 3).
However, you can use the optional alarm controls to set up more
sophisticated interactions with the data source when alarms are
triggered, acknowledged, silenced, and reset. For example, you can set
up the data source to acknowledge, silence, and reset alarms. You can
also use optional alarm controls to close the alarm display or allow the
data source to close the alarm display.
controls that work with a specific alarm trigger. You can assign a
different set of controls to each alarm trigger.
The Handshake control is useful for triggers that use the Value data
type. Program the data source to queue alarm notifications when
multiple alarms are generated for the same trigger. Use the Handshake
control to notify the data source that RSView has detected the alarm
notification. Then the data source can send the next alarm to RSView.
Setting up alarms ■
9–21
How the Ack control works
If you assign this control and specify an “Acknowledge all” value for
the trigger, when the data source sends the “Acknowledge all” value to
this control, all unacknowledged alarms for the trigger are
acknowledged.
Make sure that the “Acknowledge all” value is not the same as one of
the trigger values.
Set up the data source to send the correct value to the Remote Ack
control when you want a remote acknowledgement to take place.
1. Create an alarm trigger for an analog tag called Alarm. Use the
Value trigger type.
4. Create an alarm message for the alarm trigger, with the trigger
value 1.
5. Set up the data source to write the value at the Ack control to the
Remote Ack control whenever the value of the Ack control
changes from 0 to a non-zero value.
At run time, when an alarm with the trigger value 1 is generated, the
alarm message appears at both locations simultaneously. If the operator
Setting up alarms ■
9–23
acknowledges the alarm at Location 1, RSView writes the value 1 to the
Ack control.
This control is used to notify the data source that the remote
acknowledgement has been detected by RSView.
When the application starts, the Remote Ack Handshake control has a
value of 1. When the Remote Ack control value changes, the Remote
Ack Handshake control’s value toggles from 1 to 0. The next time the
Remote Ack value changes, the Remote Ack Handshake value toggles
from 0 to 1.
The Remote Ack Handshake value toggles whether or not the new
Remote Ack value matches a trigger value.
This control is used to send the message associated with a trigger value
to the data source.
The message is sent only if the alarm message’s Message to Tag option
is selected.
This control is used to notify the PLC that a message has been sent to
the data source.
Messages are queued if the Message Notification for the trigger is set
to 1.
Use the Message Handshake control to notify the data source that the
PLC has detected the message notification. Then the data source can
send the next message to the PLC.
Setting up alarms ■
9–25
Remote Close Display—Assign a tag or expression to this control
to allow the data source to close the alarm display.
Set up the data source to send a new non-zero value to the Remote
Silence control each time you want a remote silencing of alarms to take
place.
The Status Reset control is also set to 1 if the Remote Status Reset
control changes to a new non-zero value, and remains set for the hold
time.
While the hold time is in effect, the alarm status cannot be reset again.
The status of alarms keeps updating during the hold time.
When this control changes to a new non-zero value, the status of all
alarms is reset, as described on page 9-9. Alarms can be reset using
other methods regardless of this control's value.
Set up the data source to send a new non-zero value to the Remote
Status Reset control each time you want a remote resetting of alarm
status to take place.
When the application starts, this control has a value of 0. If the alarm
display (assigned in the Alarm Setup editor) closes, this control is set to
1 for the hold time. At the end of the hold time, the control is reset to 0.
Setting up alarms ■
9–27
How the Remote Close Display control works
When this control changes to a new non-zero value, the alarm display
closes. The alarm display can be closed using other methods regardless
of this control’s value.
Set up the data source to send a new non-zero value to the Remote
Close Display control each time you want a remote closing of the alarm
display to take place.
Summary of steps
Follow these steps to set up alarms:
2. In the Startup editor, ensure that the Alarms box is checked (it is
checked by default). See Chapter 23.
To set up alarms
3. Click OK.
Setting up alarms ■
9–29
Creating alarm triggers
You can use analog, digital, and array tags to generate alarms.
3. Click OK. The trigger you create is selected in the “Select trigger”
box.
The “Acknowledge all” value works with the Ack and Remote Ack
controls. For details, see page 9-22.
Setting up alarms ■
9–31
Optional trigger connections If desired, assign tags to use for
handshaking and acknowledgement for the selected trigger. You
can also specify a tag to send alarm messages to. For more
information about optional trigger controls, see page 9-20.
1. In the Messages tab, in the Trigger column, select the trigger for
which to create messages.
To assign the same message to all the triggers you set up in the
Triggers tab, select <AllTriggers>.
Setting up alarms ■
9–33
trigger for each message.
To create a line break in the message, type \n. The message will
continue at the beginning of the next line. (Multi-line messages are
supported in the alarm banner graphic object only.)
The message is added to the alarm log file, and can be displayed in
any alarm list, alarm banner, and alarm status list objects in your
graphic displays, even if you do not check this box.
Audio For Windows 2000 and Windows XP applications, check
this box to sound the run-time computer’s internal beeper when
this alarm is generated. The beeper beeps continuously, .5 seconds
on and .5 seconds off, until the alarm is silenced.
If the context menu doesn’t open, click in another cell, then right-
click the Message column.
4. In the String Edit dialog box, position the cursor where you want
to insert the variable.
5. Click Insert Variable, and then click the type of variable to use.
6. Make your choices in the dialog box that opens, and then click OK.
Setting up alarms ■
9–35
Deleting messages
To delete a message
Select any cell in the message’s row, and then press Delete. Shift-
click in a column to select cells for multiple messages.
Copying messages
To copy a message
2. In the Message column, click the cell to paste the first message in,
and then press Ctrl-V (or right-click the cell and then click Paste).
Setting up alarms ■
9–37
To specify how alarms are displayed, stored, and silenced
1. In the Advanced tab, in the Current alarms box, select the graphic
display to use to display alarm messages. Click the Browse button
to select from a list of all the graphic displays in the application.
The specified display opens when an alarm occurs, if you select the
Display option for the alarm message (in the Messages tab).
For information about the different graphic displays you can use to
display alarm information, see page 9-5.
For more information about the alarm log file, see page 9-9.
Hold time Select the hold time to use when acknowledging,
silencing, and resetting alarms. RSView holds the values at the Ack,
Silence, Status Reset, and Close Display controls for the specified
length of time, then resets the controls to 0.
Maximum update rate Select the rate at which to update tag
values. Data servers use this rate to send tag values to RSView. This
rate is used for the tags you’ve defined as alarm triggers, including
tags used in expressions. This rate is also used for tags assigned to
the Remote controls, and for tags used as embedded variables in
alarm messages. All other alarm tags are updated when specific
events occur, as described in the section beginning on page 9-20.
In the Startup editor, ensure that the Alarms box is checked (it is
checked by default). For more information, see Chapter 23.
Setting up alarms ■
9–39
audible alarm signals, edit the default display to remove the silence
alarms button.
Alarm banner
graphic object
Buttons
You can use the [ALARM] display as is, or modify the display. For
example, you can change the color of the objects, or add and remove
buttons.
For more information about the alarm banner, see page 9-50.
Header
Alarm list
graphic object
Buttons
You can use the [ALARM MULTI-LINE] display as is, or modify the
display. For example, you can select which alarm triggers’ alarms to
display in the list.
Setting up alarms ■
9–41
The alarm list graphic object
For more information about the alarm list, see page 9-48.
Header
Buttons
You can use the [STATUS] display as is, or modify the display. For
example, you can select which alarm triggers’ alarms to display in the
list, or remove buttons that you don't want to use.
Setting up alarms ■
9–43
The alarm status list in the [STATUS] display is set up to show the
status of active alarms (but you can edit it, if desired).
For more information about the alarm status list, see page 9-51.
Header
Alarm list
graphic object
Buttons
You can use the [HISTORY] display as is, or modify the display. For
example, you can select which alarm triggers’ alarms to display in the
list, or remove buttons that you don’t want to use.
For more information about the alarm list, see page 9-48.
Setting up alarms ■
9–45
Buttons in the [HISTORY] display
For information about copying objects from a library into your graphic
display, see page 15-61.
3. In the dialog box, navigate to the Libraries folder, and then click
the name of the display to add, for example, [HISTORY].gfx.
5. Once you copy the display into your application, you can use it as
the display to open when alarms are triggered, or use it in
conjunction with other alarm displays.
If you create your own graphic display, use an On Top display and
select the Cannot Be Replaced option.
For information about the graphic objects you can use to display alarm
information, see the information starting on page 9-48. For
information about creating graphic displays and graphic objects, see
Chapters 14 and 15.
Setting up alarms ■
9–47
Opening and closing the alarm display
You can also create a goto display button that the operator can press to
open the alarm display. For information about setting up a goto display
button and specifying the display to open, see Chapter 16.
You can use multiple alarm lists, in the same display or in different
displays. Each alarm list displays information from the same alarm log
file, although you can set up different lists to display different
information.
What is displayed
If you set up the list to show the alarms for specific alarm triggers,
only alarms for those triggers are displayed.
If the message is too long to fit in the object, the last displayed
character is replaced with an asterisk. Similarly, if a column heading
is too long to fit in the column, the last displayed character is
replaced with an asterisk.
If alarms are currently being sorted by time, alarms are listed with
the newest alarms on top.
Setting up alarms ■
9–49
If there are multiple instances of the same alarm, these alarms are
sorted by time with the newest on top.
If alarms are sorted by time, and the top alarm is highlighted, as new
alarms occur, the old alarms scroll down, but the highlight remains
at the top.
What is displayed
You can set up the banner to queue new alarms until the operator
clears the current alarm, or to always display the most recent alarm.
If the list is set up to show both active and inactive alarms, when an
alarm is active, an asterisk (*) appears in the alarm status column, if
displayed.
The alarm status list graphic object displays the status of alarms,
including whether an alarm has been triggered, how many times an
alarm has been triggered, and for how long.
The alarm status list can be in the [STATUS] display, in an alarm display
you have created, or can be placed on any display in your application.
Setting up alarms ■
9–51
You can use multiple alarm status lists, in the same display or in
different displays. You can set up different lists to display different
information.
For information about setting up alarm status lists, see page 16-283.
What is displayed
If you set up the list to show the alarms for specific alarm triggers,
only alarms for those triggers are displayed.
If the message is too long to fit in the object, the last character that
would fit is replaced with an asterisk. Similarly, if a column heading
is too long to fit in the column, the last character that would fit is
replaced with an asterisk.
The first time a display containing the alarm status list is opened,
the first page of alarms is displayed.
If the list is set up to display active alarms only, and alarms that were
visible when the display was closed are no longer active, the alarms
are removed from the list.
If alarms have been reset since the display was last opened, the first
page of alarms is displayed.
Alarm buttons
You can use these alarm buttons to interact with the alarm list, alarm
banner, or alarm status list:
Setting up alarms ■
9–53
Use this button With this To do this
graphic
object
Clear alarm history Alarm list Remove all alarms from the
alarm log file and all alarm lists.
If the Ack control is assigned
for any of the alarm triggers,
the operator is prompted to
acknowledge all alarms before
clearing them.
You can assign any caption you choose to the labels on the alarm
buttons.
Similarly, you can link the clear alarm banner button to a specific alarm
banner. This option is useful if you have multiple alarm banners in the
same graphic display. And you can link the alarm status mode button
to a specific alarm status list.
For more information about linking buttons to objects, see page 16-17.
Setting up alarms ■
9–55
Key buttons
You can also use these key button graphic objects to interact with the
alarm list, alarm status list, or alarm banner:
You can link key buttons to a specific alarm object, or set up the
buttons to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display.
For more information, see page 16-17.
For information about creating graphic objects, see Chapter 15. For
information about setting up key buttons, see page 16-36.
If assigned, the alarm trigger’s Ack control is set to the alarm trigger
value at the data source. The value is held as long as the operator
presses the button, or for the hold time, whichever is longer.
When the operator presses the acknowledge all alarms button, all
unacknowledged alarms in the system are acknowledged.
Setting up alarms ■
9–57
presses the button, or for the hold time, whichever is longer. Then
the control’s value is reset to 0.
If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect and the operator
presses acknowledge all alarms, the button press is ignored.
Silencing alarms
When the operator presses the silence alarms button, any audible signal
triggered by an alarm is silenced and the Silence control is set to 1 for
the hold time or for the duration of the button press, whichever is
longer. Then the control's value is reset to 0.
If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect and the operator presses
silence alarms, the button press is ignored.
When the operator presses the clear alarm history button, all alarms in
the system are deleted from the alarm log file and from all alarm lists.
For information about the alarm log file, see page 9-9.
If the Ack control is assigned for any of the alarm triggers, the operator
is prompted to acknowledge the unacknowledged messages before
deleting them. If the operator chooses to acknowledge the alarms, the
When the operator presses the clear alarm banner button, the displayed
alarm is cleared from the banner. The alarm remains in the alarm log
file and in all alarm lists it appears in.
Sorting alarms
When the operator presses the sort alarms button, the sort order
toggles from time to trigger value or from trigger value to time. The
sort order applies to all alarms in all alarm lists and in the alarm log file.
When the operator presses the reset alarm status button, the alarm
status of each alarm is reset as follows:
If the Status Reset control is assigned (in the Alarm Setup editor), it is
set to 1 for the hold time or for the duration of the button press,
whichever is longer. If a hold time from a previous reset alarm status
button press is still in effect, the button press is ignored.
Setting up alarms ■
9–59
Pressing the clear alarm history button also resets the status of all
alarms.
if an alarm is still active, the number of times the alarm has been
triggered is increased by 1.
If the current type displayed is all alarms, the list changes to display
active alarms only.
The change affects the linked or selected alarm status list only, not all
alarm status lists.
10 Setting up FactoryTalk
Diagnostics
This chapter describes:
FactoryTalk Diagnostics.
operator comments.
Destinations
FactoryTalk Diagnostics allows you to send diagnostics messages to
multiple destinations.
an ODBC database.
At run time
a printer
Message routing
You can decide which destinations receive which kinds of messages.
This allows you to make the right information available to the right
person, in the right place.
For example:
You can send messages that contain information about what the
system is doing to the local log file. You can also send warnings
about things that might go wrong if left unattended to the local log
file.
Categories
Message severities
Audiences
Messages for all tag writes, whether successful or unsuccessful, are sent
to the Engineer and Secure audiences. All other messages are sent to
the Operator.
On the View menu, click Diagnostics List. A check mark beside the
menu item indicates the Diagnostics List is displayed.
On the View menu, click Diagnostics List. The option is turned off
when no check mark appears.
In RSView Studio, click the Tools menu, and then click Diagnostics
Viewer.
Specify which
destinations
receive what
categories of
messages.
4. Click OK.
Maximum log size Type or select the maximum size of the log file
in kilobytes.
Overwrite events as needed Select this option to overwrite the
oldest event in the log file when the log file becomes full and a new
event occurs.
Do not overwrite events Select this option if you don’t want the
system to overwrite any events in the log file. To prevent the log file
from becoming full, clear the log file manually, as described on
page 10-17. If the log file becomes full, new events are discarded.
Microsoft Access
Oracle
You can also specify that messages remain in the local log file for a
period of time after they have been exported to the ODBC-compliant
database. This is useful in the event of a network failure, or any other
reason that causes the database to be unavailable. In this case, the
If the target table does not exist, and if you have a connection to the
database, you can create the target table. Type the target table name and
then click Create Table.
Maintain connection Specify how long you want the connection to
the ODBC-compliant database to remain open. Type the number of
minutes, or click indefinitely.
Login required If the ODBC database and application are located on
different computers, you must enter a Database user ID and password
to connect to the database. Check Login required, and then type the
user ID and password.
Routing messages
For each destination you set up, you can specify how messages are
routed.
2. Check the boxes for the messages types you want to log, and the
audiences you want to receive them.
Clear a check box if you don’t want the message type to be sent to
a particular audience.
IM PO RT AN T RSView does not log any messages for the audience called
Developer. Selecting check boxes for the audience Developer has
no effect.
Tip
To receive messages:
3. In the Port box, type the port number on the Windows 2000 or
Windows XP computer to send the messages to.
3. If you want to save a copy of the log file before it is cleared, click
Yes when prompted.
Printed messages list the date and time, the category of system activity,
and the message text. By default, messages are not printed at run time.
The messages that are printed and displayed depend on how you set up
FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the run-time computer:
You can use the [DIAGNOSTICS] display as is, edit the display, or
create your own display. Another option is to place the diagnostics list
object in a graphic display that doesn’t open automatically when a
message is generated.
2. To print messages at run time, check the box for the severity of
message to print.
For information about the different graphic displays you can use to
display diagnostics messages, see page 10-19.
6. Click OK.
You can use the [DIAGNOSTICS] display as is, or modify the display.
For example, you can change the color of the objects, or add and
remove buttons. Or, you can create your own graphic display to use for
If you create your own graphic display, use an On Top display and
select the Cannot Be Replaced option.
For more information about the diagnostics list, see page 10-25. For
information about the buttons you can use with the list, see page 10-26.
For information about creating graphic displays and graphic objects,
see Chapters 14 and 15.
The display remains open until the operator closes the display.
If you decide not to open the diagnostics display automatically, you can
create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the
diagnostics display. For information about setting up a goto display
button and specifying the display to open, see page 16-149.
The operator can close the display by pressing a close display button.
At run time, when a severity of system activity occurs that you’ve set up
to log, a message about the activity is added to the diagnostics list. The
diagnostics list can be in the [DIAGNOSTICS] display, in a diagnostics
display you have created, or can be placed on any display in your
application.
You can use multiple diagnostics lists, in the same display or in different
displays. Each diagnostics list displays the same information.
What is displayed
If the message is too long to fit in the list, the last displayed
character is replaced with an asterisk (*).
Diagnostics buttons
You can use these diagnostics buttons to interact with the diagnostics
list:
You can assign any captions you choose to the labels on the diagnostics
buttons.
You can link the diagnostics clear button to a specific diagnostics list.
When the operator presses the button, the selected message is deleted
from the linked diagnostics list, and also from any other diagnostics
lists in the application. For information about linking buttons to
objects, see page 16-17.
Key buttons
You can also use these key button graphic objects to interact with the
diagnostics list:
For information about creating graphic objects, see Chapter 15. For
information about setting up buttons, see page 16-27.
You can use the trend graphic object to display the data that you’ve
logged. At run time, when the operator opens a graphic display
containing a trend, the trend displays values from the data log file for
the data log model that is running. The data log model specifies which
data to collect in the data log file.
In addition to displaying historical values from the data log file, trends
can display current values for the tags in the model. Trends can also
display current values for tags or expressions that are not in a data log
model. For more information about trends, see Chapter 18.
A data log model defines which tags to log data for, as well as how and
where the data is logged. For information about creating a data log
model, see page 11-7.
You can set up multiple data log models, but you can run only one data
log model at a time. For information about running a different data log
model, see page 11-14.
The data log model can contain up to 100 analog or digital tags.
You cannot use string tags, tag placeholders, or expressions in your data
log model.
If you delete a tag from the data log model, previously logged data for
the tag is not accessible unless you add the tag back to the model.
The data log files are retained when you restart an application after a
shutdown or power loss. You can delete the log files from the run-time
computer at application startup.
For information about deleting the log files, see Chapter 26.
You’ll need this information if you log to a custom path and want to
delete the log files manually.
There are two methods for triggering data logging. You can set up
logging so tag values are logged:
Logging periodically
Logging on change
On-change logging is used to log only tags whose values have changed.
For HMI tags, before logging occurs, the change must equal a specified
percentage of change in the tag value. The percentage is based on HMI
tags’ minimum and maximum values as set up in the Tags editor. Only
the tags that change by the specified percentage are logged. If you
specify a percentage of 0, all changes are logged.
You can also specify a heartbeat rate, to log values at specified times
even if no tag value changes have occurred. The heartbeat ensures that
the data in the log file is current. The heartbeat is also a good way to
ensure that data logging is working and acquiring valid data.
The heartbeat cannot be less than the maximum update rate, which is
the rate at which data servers send tag values to RSView.
You can store data log files in any one of these locations:
Summary of steps
Follow these steps to set up data logging:
1. In the Data Log Models editor, set up a data log model that
specifies how many log values to store, the conditions that trigger
data logging, where to log data, and which tags to monitor.
4. In the Component name box, type a name for the model, and then
click OK.
5. Click Close.
Save tool
When your data exceeds the limit, the oldest data is deleted from the
data log file. The higher the limit, the more space the data log file
You can specify a path to a folder that does not exist. If it doesn’t exist,
it is created at run time, as long as the user logged in to the run-time
computer has folder creation rights at the specified location.
Log Periodically In the Interval box, type a time and click a time
unit to specify how often tag values are logged. All tags in the model
are logged each time this interval expires.
If you do not want to use the heartbeat, type 0. If you type 0, tags
values are logged only when a tag value changes.
1. In the Tags in Model tab, in the “Tags to add” box, type the names
of the tags to log.
2. To browse for tag names, click the Browse button to open the Tag
Browse button
Browser.
In the Startup editor, turn on data logging and specify the data log
model to use at run time. For more information, see Chapter 23.
If the storage device becomes full due to lack of disk space, data
logging stops and an error message is sent to FactoryTalk
Diagnostics. When sufficient disk space becomes available, data
logging continues, but the data that would have been logged during
the intervening time cannot be retrieved.
If there is not enough disk space at application startup, the data log
model does not start when the application starts. An error message
is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics.
12 Creating information
messages
This chapter describes:
The following example shows how the key parts of the information
message system work together.
Trigger values cannot be 0. Digital tags have two possible values, 0 and
1. Therefore, if you use a digital tag you can only use the value 1 to
trigger a message. If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different
messages, create an expression that adds 1 to the digital tag’s value. That
way, you can use the trigger values 1 and 2.
If you use an analog tag or an expression, you can use any non-zero
integer or floating-point value to trigger an alarm. Floating-point values
You can create multiple information message files, but you can use only
one message file at run time. For information about using a different
message file, see page 12-15.
If the context menu doesn’t open, click in another cell, then right-
click the Message column.
5. In the String Edit dialog box, position the cursor where you want
to insert the variable.
6. Click Insert Variable, and then click the type of variable to use.
7. Make your choices in the dialog box that opens, and then click OK.
Deleting messages
To delete a message
Select any cell in the message’s row, and then press Delete. Shift-
click in a column to select cells for multiple messages.
To copy a message
2. In the Message column, click the cell to paste the first message in,
and then press Ctrl-V (or right-click the cell and then click Paste).
2. In the “Display file name” box, select the graphic display to use to
display information messages. Click the Browse button to select
from a list of all the graphic displays in the application.
If you clear the box, no display is opened when the Value control
changes to an assigned trigger value.
For information about the different graphic displays you can use to
display information messages, see page 12-5.
If you leave the box blank, no messages are ever displayed. If you
specify a message file, it is used for all Information Message display
objects you place in your graphic displays.
Tag values for the Value control are also updated when the
application is started.
7. Click OK.
You can use the [INFORMATION] display as is, or modify the display.
For example, you can change the color of the objects, or add and
remove buttons. Or, you can create your own graphic display to use for
displaying information messages. In the Information Setup editor,
specify the display to use.
You can assign any caption you choose to the labels on the buttons.
If you create your own graphic display, use an On Top display and
select the Cannot Be Replaced option.
You can also create a goto display button that the operator can press to
open the information message display. For information about setting
up a goto display button and specifying the display to open, see
Chapter 16.
The operator can also close the display by pressing a close display
button.
At run time, when the Value control at the data source changes from 0
to a non-zero value, the assigned information message display opens.
If the value matches a message’s trigger value, the associated
information message appears in the information message display
graphic object. The object can be in the default [INFORMATION]
display, in an information message display you have created, or can be
placed in any display in your application.
What is displayed
For information about how values are rounded, see page 7-3.
Your application can use only one message file at a time. Follow this
procedure to switch message files.
13 Setting up security
Set up security in your application to prevent users from accessing
certain graphic displays.
This chapter describes the RSView security system, and outlines how
to:
set up security.
To limit the users who have access to the application or parts of the
application, you must set up user accounts and passwords.
Summary of steps
There are 16 security codes, A through P, and the asterisk symbol (*).
The * represents unlimited access. You can assign combinations of
security codes to users, to allow each user access to a different set of
displays.
Setting up security ■
13–3
1. Assign security codes to graphic displays as follows:
To this display Assign this security code
Alarm History A
Boiler B
Furnace C
Top Secret D
SUPERVISOR A, B, C
OPERATOR A, B
ADMIN All
DEFAULT None.
In this example, you could have assigned the same security code to the
Alarm History and Boiler displays, since all users except the DEFAULT
user have access to these displays.
Setting up security ■
13–5
1. In the User Accounts editor, assign security codes to users.
To this user Assign these security codes
OPERATOR A, B
SUPERVISOR A, B, C
ADMIN All
DEFAULT None
CurrentUserHasCode( E )
When the graphic display containing the numeric input enable button
is open, the SUPERVISOR and ADMIN user can see the button. If the
OPERATOR or DEFAULT user is logged in, the button is not visible.
Form Area
Spreadsheet
area
Use the scroll bar or drag the border of Double-click in the security code columns
the editor to see more columns. to toggle between Yes and No.
Setting up security ■
13–7
Using the Accept and Discard buttons
When you enter information, the Prev and Next buttons change to
Accept and Discard buttons. Click Accept to save user account
information. Click Discard to cancel changes to a user account.
Setting up security ■
13–9
Setting up user accounts for RSView users
The name is not case sensitive when the user types it at run time.
However, RSView uses all uppercase for names in expressions.
You can use the form or spreadsheet section of the editor to enter
all user information except passwords. Use the form area to enter
passwords.
Security Codes To prevent the user from having access to a
security code, clear the check box for the code, or double-click in
the code’s column in the spreadsheet to change the setting to N.
4. Click Accept.
Setting up security ■
13–11
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set up additional user accounts.
In the spreadsheet area, click the number at the left end of the row
for the user to delete, and then press Delete on your keyboard.
Users cannot change passwords at run time. You can change passwords
in the User Accounts editor.
1. In the spreadsheet area, click the row for the user’s account.
2. In the form area, in the Password box, type the new password.
Before you can make use of user accounts in RSView, you must first
create the user accounts in your Windows domain. To do this in a
Windows network domain, your network must have at least one
Windows server acting as a domain controller. You cannot use
Windows Workgroups.
3. In the Windows Domain list, select the name of the domain from
which you want to add users.
Setting up security ■
13–13
4. In the Windows Users or Groups list, click the user or group
names you want to include in the RSView User Accounts list.
6. Click OK.
The user or group’s security codes are deleted from the User
Accounts editor.
If you remove users from the Windows domain, they are not removed
automatically from the RSView user list. You must remove the users
from the RSView user list manually.
2. In the account column, click the User name or Group name of the
account you want to set up.
Login Macro To run a macro when this user logs in, type the name
of the macro, or click the Browse button to select from a list of
Browse button macros in the application.
Setting up security ■
13–15
Logout Macro To run a macro when this user logs out, type the
name of the macro, or click the Browse button to select from a list
of macros in the application.
Password You cannot assign or modify a password for a Windows
domain account from RSView. To change the password, use the
Users and Passwords tool in Windows.
Security Codes To prevent the user from having access to a
security code, clear the check box for the code, or double-click in
the code’s column in the spreadsheet to change the setting to N.
4. Click Accept.
Logging in
When the application starts, the DEFAULT user is automatically
logged in until a new user logs in.
Specify the startup display in the Startup editor, in the Initial graphic
box.
For information about creating graphic objects, see Chapter 15. For
information about setting up login buttons, see page 16-27.
For information about using the Startup editor, see Chapter 23.
Logging out
To best maintain your security system, users who log in should also log
out.
Setting up security ■
13–17
To set up automatic logout
4. Click OK.
At run time, when the inactivity period expires, the current user is
logged out, and the default user is logged in. Any macros configured to
run at user logout will run.
Do not use a title bar on the application window. To turn off the
title bar for the application window, in the Project Settings editor, in
the Runtime tab, clear the Title bar check box.
For more information about using the Project Settings editor, see
Chapter 4.
Use the DeskLock tool to prevent users from having access to the
desktop, to prevent access to operating system functions such as
restarting Windows or shutting down tasks. For more information, see
page 24-20.
4. In the RSView User Accounts list, click the user name or group
name you want to delete.
Setting up security ■
13–19
Assigning security to graphic displays
Assign security to graphic displays in the Graphic Displays editor. You
can:
assign security when you create the graphic display, or at any time
after creating the display.
assign whichever codes you want, in any order. For example, you
can choose to use only the codes D and P and you can assign P
before you assign D.
To allow unlimited access to the display, select the asterisk (*). The
* is selected by default.
Setting up security ■
13–21
Summary of security features in a sample startup
display
This section provides an example of how to use all the security features
in a startup graphic display called Log In.
2. In the Project Settings editor, clear the Title bar check box.
5. Set up the goto display button to open the Main Menu display. If
desired, attach visibility animation to the goto display button, so
that only authorized users can see the button.
8. In the Display Settings dialog box, assign the security code * to the
Log In display, so that all users have access to it.
9. In the Startup editor, in the Initial graphic box, select the Log In
display.
Users who have access to the application can use the application and
log out. Make sure you provide a way for users to navigate back to this
display to log out.
To see what the startup Log In display looks like when different users
are logged in, see Example 3 on page 13-25.
You can also use the Remote Display Number control to open the
startup Log In display when a user logs out. This might be useful if
users can log out from various locations (graphic displays) within the
application. For an example, see page 8-7.
Setting up security ■
13–23
For more information about See
The DEFAULT user is the current user when the application starts,
and when a user logs out.
4. Click Apply.
CurrentUserName( ) == “ADMIN”
4. Click Apply.
Setting up security ■
13–25
13–26 ■ RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
This is what the display looks like when a user who is authorized to use
the application but not to stop the application has logged in:
Setting up security ■
13–27
This is what the display looks like when the ADMIN user (who has
authority to stop the application) has logged in:
The elements that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects.
You can create objects in the Graphic Displays editor, or copy them
from a graphic library or from another application.
You can use up to 1,000 tags per graphic display. This limit includes the
tags contained in embedded variables.
Before you begin, plan your displays. Think about what information
the operator needs to see, and the best way to provide the information.
For example:
Does the operator need to know the exact speed of a conveyor belt,
or just whether the belt is moving, jammed, or stopped?
Also consider the run-time environment and how the operator will use
the application:
5. In the Component name box, type a name for the display, and then
Save tool click OK.
In the Graphics folder, open the Displays folder and then double-
click the display name, or right-click the display name and then click
Open.
You can also drag and drop the display from the Application
Explorer to an empty area in the RSView Studio workspace.
Standard toolbar
Graphics toolbar
Objects toolbar
Display area
Object explorer
Diagnostics List
Status bar
Property Panel
The illustration shows the Graphics and Objects toolbars, which you’ll
probably want to keep open at all times. There are other toolbars that
you can use when performing specific tasks such as assigning colors to
objects. For more information, see page 14-9.
Display area
This area is your graphic display. The appearance of the display in the
Graphic Displays editor is similar to what you see at run time, except
for the title bar and the display position. If you change the zoom
settings, or resize a Replace display by dragging the borders, these
changes do not affect the appearance of the run-time display.
If you want to use a title bar at run time, set up the title bar in the
Application Settings editor. Also use the Application Settings editor to
specify the display size (for Replace displays), position, and whether to
use a border at run time. For more information, see page 4-12.
You can change the display type, color, and other settings in the Display
Settings dialog box. For more information, see page 14-16.
Property Panel
The Property Panel displays the properties of the selected objects, and
shows what values are assigned to the properties. For example, it shows
whether an object’s background style (BackStyle) is solid or
transparent. It also lists the object’s controls, and shows which tags or
expressions have been assigned to them.
Object Explorer
The Object Explorer lists all the objects and groups of objects in your
display (except objects that are converted to wallpaper). You can click
an object in the list to select it in your display. You can also right-click
the object to open the context menu for the object.
You can also use the Object Explorer to highlight objects by object
type, highlight objects that have animation attached, and to highlight
objects with specific tag or expression assignments. You can keep the
Object Explorer open as you work on different objects and in different
displays. For more information, see page 15-32.
Status bar
This section describes features of the Graphic Displays editor that help
you create your displays. It describes how to:
set up a grid that you can use to position and size objects precisely.
correct mistakes.
The items on the menu depend on the cursor’s location. For example,
when you right-click an object, the menu contains the most common
actions you can perform on that object.
To display a toolbar
On the View menu, select Toolbars, and then click the toolbar to
display.
The menu displays a check mark beside the toolbars that are already
open.
Click the double “grab bars” at the left or top of the toolbar, and
then drag. Press the Ctrl key to prevent accidental redocking.
Click the toolbar’s title bar, and then drag. Press the Ctrl key to
prevent accidental redocking.
To dock a toolbar
Click the toolbar’s title bar, and then drag to any edge of the
workspace.
To close a toolbar
On the View menu, select Toolbars, and then click the toolbar to
close, or click the toolbar’s Close button.
Make the grid passive to position an element between the grid lines.
Make the grid active, and the next object you draw or place is
automatically aligned with the grid. Making the grid active does not
affect the placement of existing objects.
When the Grid Settings dialog box is not open you can turn the grid
on by clicking Show Grid on the View menu.
When the Grid Settings dialog box is not open you can make the
grid active by clicking Snap On on the View menu.
In the Grid Settings dialog box, clear the Snap To Grid check box,
or on the View menu click Snap On to toggle the option off.
In the Grid Setting dialog box, clear the Show Grid check box, or
on the View menu, click Show Grid to toggle the option off.
To zoom in on objects
To zoom out
Zoom out
On the View menu, click Zoom Out, or click the Zoom Out tool.
Correcting mistakes
If you change your mind about something you did, you can undo the
action. If you change your mind again, you can redo the action.
You can undo and redo all the operations you performed since you last
saved the display, one operation at a time.
To undo an operation
To redo an operation
Redo On the Edit menu, click Redo, or click the Redo tool.
To test the objects in your displays as you work, use the Test Display
tool to switch to test mode. When you are finished testing, switch back
to edit mode to continue editing.
The Diagnostics List shows messages about system activities when you
test your graphic displays. You can specify the types of messages to
display in the Diagnostics List, move the list, resize it, and clear the
messages in it.
On the View menu, click Test Display, or click the Test Display
Test Display mode tool.
At run time, you can have only one Replace display open at a time.
When the operator opens a Replace display, this is what happens:
On Top displays that do not use the Cannot Be Replaced option are
closed.
On Top Use this option to create “pop-up” displays that open on top
of the current Replace display. Usually, On Top displays are smaller
than Replace displays, so the operator doesn't lose track of display
navigation.
You can open multiple On Top displays. If more than one On Top
display is open, the display that has focus, or had the most recent focus,
appears on top.
Use the Cannot Be Replaced option if you want the On Top display to
remain open when a new Replace display is opened.
On Top displays do not have a Close button in the title bar. Be sure to
create a close button graphic object in On Top displays so the operator
can close them.
The operator cannot move an On Top display by dragging its title bar.
The run-time position of the display is fixed (according to the position
settings defined for the display).
Resizing displays
The application window size is used for all Replace displays. If you
change the application window size after you have designed any
graphic displays, Replace displays are resized, but any objects in the
displays remain in the same position as before. On Top displays are not
resized.
You can change the display area of a display while you’re working on it
by dragging the border of the display area. For example, you might
want to make the display area smaller so you can see parts of two
displays in order to drag and drop objects between them.
Changing the display area in this manner does not change the display
size for Replace displays. For On Top displays that are sized with the
“Use Current Size” option, dragging the border does resize the display.
If you select On Top and you want the display to remain open when
a new Replace display opens, select Cannot Be Replaced.
Display Number For Replace displays, if you want the data source
to open the display remotely at run time, specify a unique display
number. Otherwise, accept the default number.
This option is useful for On Top displays, if you want the Replace
display to retain the focus after the On Top display opens.
The operator can still touch or click the On Top display to give it
input focus.
Maximum Tag Update Rate Select the rate at which to update tag
values. Data servers use this rate to send tag values to RSView. This
rate is used for the tags assigned to objects in the graphic display,
including tags used in expressions and embedded variables.
Tag values are also updated when the graphic display is opened.
Size For On Top displays, specify the display size. The operator
cannot resize the display at run time.
The operator can still select and use input objects, but there is no
visual indication that the object is selected.
Select a color that stands out from the display’s background color
or wallpaper objects. For information about wallpaper objects, see
the next section.
For a single object, you can right-click it and then click Convert to
Wallpaper.
On the Edit menu, select Wallpaper, and then click Unlock All
Wallpaper.
All objects in the graphic display are converted back to their original
state.
You can:
look at the objects and displays to get ideas for your own
application.
drag and drop (or copy and paste) objects from the libraries into
your own displays.
use the objects as they are or change them to suit your needs.
You can also create a graphic display and then use Add Component
Into Application to add the display to the Libraries folder.
4. In the dialog box, navigate to the Gfx folder, and then click the
.gfx file for the display to use.
3. In the dialog box, navigate to the Libraries folder, and then click
the .gfx file for the library to use.
If you specify a different directory but want to use the libraries that
come with RSView, use My Computer or Windows Explorer to copy
the library component files into the directory you’ve specified, or else
Browse button
To create a new folder, click New Folder and then specify the name
for the folder. Click the new folder to select it.
.bmp—bitmap images
.dxf—AutoCAD® files
.wmf—Windows metafiles
You import and place .dxf and .wmf files in your displays in one step.
Once imported, they are converted to drawing objects. For more
information about using these types of files in your displays, see
page 15-27.
RSView Studio comes with sets of bitmaps that are useful for
illustrating graphic objects and displays:
arrows
DIN symbols
ISA symbols
The symbols and most of the arrows are monochrome (that is, use only
two colors, one for the foreground and one for the background).
You can set up the foreground and background colors for the
monochrome images that you use for your objects.
For color images, including JPEG images, you can specify whether to
use a transparent or solid background. If you select the transparent
background style, the black portions of the image become transparent.
The bitmap files that come with RSView Studio are stored in this
directory:
The images are in folders called Arrows, DIN, ISA, ListKey, and Parts.
import the images first, and then place them in your displays as
needed. This method is useful for images that you use to illustrate
your displays.
For information about using the Image Browser, see page 14-30.
For information about copying and pasting objects, see page 15-61.
If you will be using images that have more than 256 colors, before
importing the images set up your video adapter to display more than
256 colors. This will ensure that the colors of imported images appear
the same as in the original. For more tips about using images, see
page 14-26.
3. Navigate to the directory where the .bmp or .jpg file is stored, and
then click the file name.
4. Click Open to add the selected files to the list in the Images folder.
Use the Image Browser to import images as needed while you set up
graphic objects.
With one or more objects selected, in the Property Panel click the
Image property, and then click the Browse button.
For information about opening the Property Panel, see page 15-42.
1. Click Add.
2. Navigate to the directory where the .bmp or .jpg file is stored, and
then click the file name.
3. Click Open to add the images to the Select image list. The first
image you added is displayed in the Preview box.
The images are also added to the Images folder in the Application
Explorer.
JPEG images are given the file extension .bmp in the Windows
Explorer, but they are not converted to bitmaps.
To scroll quickly through all the images in the list, select the first
image and then press the Down Arrow key.
5. When you’re finished viewing images, click the image to use on the
object's label.
6. Click OK to close the Image Browser and use the selected image
on the object’s label. To close the browser without using the
selected image, click Cancel.
Clicking Cancel does not remove the imported images from the
Images folder.
You can also remove an image by clicking it in the Images folder and
then right-clicking Remove or Delete. For more information, see
page 2-19.
For large color images (16 million color, 320 x 240 pixels or larger),
JPEG images load faster than bitmaps. In all other cases, bitmaps
load faster than JPEGs.
Color JPEG images have a much smaller file size than the
equivalent bitmap image, and therefore require less disk space at
run time.
The more colors you use, the more memory is consumed, and the
longer the image takes to load and display.
Monochrome 1
16 color 4
256 color 8 (1 byte)
64 K color 16 (2 bytes)
16 million color 24 (3 bytes)
At run time, the tag values that are displayed depend on which
parameter file is used when the display opens. When you open the
display, the tags specified in the parameter file replace the tag
placeholders.
For more information about using tag placeholders, see page 15-58.
the graphic display that opens when the application is first run.
Specify the graphic display to open, and the parameter file to use
with it, in the Startup editor.
graphic displays that are opened using goto display buttons. Specify
the graphic display to open, and the parameter file to use with it,
when you set up the button.
graphic displays that are opened using display list selectors. Specify
the graphic displays to open, and the parameter files to use with
them, when you set up the display list selector.
2. Create two parameter files, called Corn and Peas, containing these
parameters:
Corn Peas
#1=Corn_Name #1=Pea_Name
#2=Corn_Temp #2=Pea_Temp
#3=Corn_Weight #3=Pea_Weight
#4=Corn_Level #4=Pea_Level
String display #1
Numeric display 1 #2
Numeric display 2 #3
Bar graph #4
5. In the Main Menu display, create a display list selector for opening
the Canning display, with two states.
6. Assign the Corn parameter file to one state, and the Peas
parameter file to the other.
7. Call the captions for the states Corn and Peas, respectively.
At run time, when the operator selects the Peas state on the display list
selector in the Main Menu, and presses the Enter key, the Canning
Overview display opens and shows the values of the Pea_ tags. When
the operator selects the Corn state, the values of the Corn_ tags are
displayed.
1. In the Parameters editor, create parameter files for each set of tags
that the display will use. In the parameter files, specify which tags
to substitute for which placeholders.
2. Type one entry for each unique placeholder in the display, in the
format <placeholder>=<tag name>.
#1=pea_weight
#2=pea_level
#3=pea_temp
3. To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, double-click the editor
where you want to insert the tag name.
Use local messages to give the operator ongoing information about the
status of devices and processes. For example, you might use local
messages to describe the status of a device whose condition cannot be
shown graphically with complete accuracy.
The messages you create in the Local Messages editor are displayed in
local message display objects in graphic displays. You can use multiple
local message display objects in your application, and link each object
to a different file of messages. Or, you can use the same file of messages
for multiple local message display objects.
The local message display object always appears in the graphic display
it’s placed in, whether or not there is a message to display. However, the
The following example shows how the key parts of the local message
system work together.
The tag has this When the hoist has this status
value
1 At bottom
2 Raising
3 Stopped between the top and bottom
4 Lowering
5 At top
At run time, when the operator views the graphic display containing
the local message display object, the status of the hoist is displayed.
Create messages associated with each tag value that you want to inform
the operator about. Assign each message a trigger value, and set up the
data source to send the trigger value to the Value control.
If you use an analog tag or an expression, you can use any non-zero
integer or floating point value to trigger an alarm. Floating point values
are rounded to the nearest integer. For information about how values
are rounded, see page 7-3.
Trigger values cannot be 0. Digital tags have two possible values, 0 and
1. Therefore, if you use a digital tag you can only use the value 1 to
trigger a message. If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different
messages, create an expression that adds 1 to the digital tag’s value. That
way, you can use the trigger values 1 and 2.
When the Value control’s value is 0, the local message display object is
cleared.
Summary of steps
For information about creating graphic objects, see Chapter 15. For
information about setting up local message display objects, see
page 16-234.
3. To create a line break in the message, type \n. The message will
continue at the beginning of the next line.
If the context menu doesn’t open, click in another cell, then right-
click the Message column.
5. In the String Edit dialog box, position the cursor where you want
to insert the variable.
6. Click Insert Variable, and then click the type of variable to use.
7. Make your choices in the dialog box that opens, and then click OK.
10. In the Component name box, type a name for the file, and then
Save tool click OK.
To delete a message
Select any cell in the message’s row, and then press Delete. Shift-
click in a column to select cells for multiple messages.
To copy a message
2. In the Message column, click the cell to paste the first message in,
and then press Ctrl-V (or right-click the cell and then click Paste).
What is displayed
For information about how values are rounded, see page 7-3.
Printing displays
You can also print graphic displays at run time, to provide a printed
record of process values such as trend data.
For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for
Windows 2000 or Windows XP applications, see page 24-11. For
information about specifying printer options for applications that will
run on a PanelView Plus or Windows CE terminal, see page 25-3.
Program the data source to trigger the change as often as you want
the data printed.
use the Properties dialog box and Property Panel to set up objects.
color objects.
name objects.
For examples of how to set up objects, see the sample applications that
come with RSView Studio. The Help also provides examples of how to
use objects.
RSView also comes with drawing objects that you can use to illustrate
your graphic displays. The drawing objects include text, bitmap images,
and geometric and freehand shapes.
The tables beginning on the next page will help you choose which
objects to use to control your application, machines, and process. The
tables group the objects according to function, provide an overview of
what each object does, and list cross-references to more detailed
information about using the objects.
About controls
Many of the objects use controls to interact with the data source. A
control is the link between the object and the data source. Depending
Text Create text for labels or instructions in the display. See page 15-15.
Image Place images in your display. For more information, see page 15-18
Panel Draw rectangles that have borders. See page 15-20
Arc Draw an arc (a segment of an ellipse or circle’s perimeter). See page 15-21
Ellipse Draw ellipses and circles. See page 15-22
Freehand Draw freehand shapes as you would with a pen on paper. See page 15-22
Line Draw straight diagonal, horizontal, and vertical lines. See page 15-23
Polygon Draw a series of connected straight lines forming a closed shape. See
page 15-24
Polyline Draw a series of connected straight lines. See page 15-24
Rectangle Draw rectangles and squares. See page 15-25
Rounded rectangle Draw rectangles and squares with rounded corners. See page 15-26
Wedge Draw a filled segment of an ellipse or circle. See page 15-21.
Goto display button Open a graphic display. For details, see page 22-5
Goto configure mode Open RSView ME Station. For details, see page 22-5
button
Return to display Close a display and return to the previous display. For details, see page 22-6
button
Close display button Close a display. Can also send a value to a tag. For details, see page 22-7
Display list selector Select a display to open from a list of displays. For details, see page 22-8
Login button Open the Login dialog box and then log in. For details, see page 13-16.
Logout button Log out of the application. For details, see page 13-17
Display print button Print the current display. For details, see page 14-47.
Print alarm history Print a report of all the alarm messages in the alarm log file. for details, see
button page 16-248
Print alarm status Print a report of the status of alarms, including how many times each alarm
button was triggered and the time in alarm. For details, see page 16-258
Shutdown button Stop the application and shut down RSView ME Station. For details, see
page 22-9.
Momentary push Start a process or action by sending one value to the tag when pressed, and
button another value when released. For details, see page 16-48.
Maintained push Toggle between two values by sending one value to the tag when pressed, and
button a second value the next time the button is pressed and released. This button is
useful for changing a setting within a machine or process, but not for starting
the machine or process. For details, see page 16-57.
Latched push button Start a machine or process. The button remains set (latched) until the process
is complete. For example, use this button to start a bag filling machine. When
the process is complete (the bag is full), the button is reset (unlatched) by the
Handshake control. For details, see page 16-66.
Multistate push Cycle through a series of values. Each time the operator presses the button, the
button value for the next state is sent to the tag. When the button is in its last state,
pressing it changes the button to its first state and writes out the first state
value.
This button is useful when you want the operator to see and select multiple
options in sequence, using a single button. The button displays the current
state of an operation by showing a different color, caption, or image to reflect
the different states. For details, see page 16-76.
Interlocked push Use a group of buttons to send values to the same tag. When the operator
button presses one button in the group, the button’s value is sent to the tag, and the
button remains highlighted as long as the tag value is the same as the button’s
value. Pressing another button in the group releases the first button, and sends
a new value to the tag. For details, see page 16-86.
Piloted control list Select from a list of states for a process or operation. The list is highlighted to
selector show the current state, and the operator or a remote device such as a PLC can
scroll through the list to select a different state.
Drawing object with Set the value of a tag by dragging the slider object. The pixel position of the
horizontal or vertical slider is translated into a value that is written to the tag. If the value of the tag
slider animation is changed at the data source, the position of the slider changes to reflect this.
For information about animation, see Chapter 17.
ActiveX object Change tag values using a third-party object connected to an analog, digital, or
string tag. When the object’s property value changes, the new value is written
to the associated tag. For details, see page 15-28.
Bar graph Numeric values in bar graph format. The bar graph increases or decreases in
size to show the changing value. For details, see page 16-196
Gauge Numeric values in dial format. The gauge’s needle moves around the dial to
show the changing value. For details, see page 16-200
Scale A static indication of the range of values for a bar graph. For details, see
page 16-206.
Multistate indicator The state of a process, on a panel that changes its color, image, or caption to
indicate the current state. Each state is set up to correspond to a numeric tag
value. For details, see page 16-172
Symbol The state of a process, using a monochrome image that changes color to
indicate the current state. Each state corresponds to a numeric tag value.
This object is useful for showing the state of a process or operation at a glance.
For details, see page 16-180
List indicator The state of a process, using a list of possible states with the current state
highlighted. Each state is represented by a caption in the list, and corresponds
to a numeric tag value.
This indicator is useful if you want to view the current state, but also want to
see the other possible states. For sequential processes, the list can alert the
operator about what happens next in the process. For details, see page 16-186.
Trend Historical or current numeric tag values, plotted against time or displayed in an
XY plot (where one or more tags’ values are plotted against another tag’s
values to show the relationship between them). For details, see Chapter 18.
Time and date display Display the current time and date. For details, see page 16-245
ActiveX object Data using a third-party object connected to an analog, digital, or string tag.
The format of the data displayed depends on the object. For details, see
page 15-28.
Drawing object with The value of a tag using a pictorial representation of the current value in
rotation, width, relation to a range of possible values. For example, use rotation animation to
height, fill, color, or show the tag value as a needle’s position on a dial.
horizontal or vertical
For color animation, assign different colors to represent different values. For
position animation
information about animation, see Chapter 17.
Pause button Trend Toggle a trend between pausing and automatic scrolling.
Next pen button Trend Change the vertical axis labels for a trend to the scale for the
next pen.
Backspace button Control list selector Move the cursor back to the highlighted item in the list.
End button Lists and trends List—move to the bottom item visible in the list.
Alarm status Alarm status list Change the type of alarms displayed in the alarm status list,
mode button from all alarms to active alarms to past alarms.
Clear alarm Alarm banner Clear the alarm in the alarm banner without removing the
banner button alarm from the alarm log file and alarm lists.
Clear alarm Alarm list Remove all alarms from the alarm log file and all alarm lists.
history button Also resets the number of times an alarm has been
triggered to 0, and the accumulated time in alarm to 0, for
all alarms.
Reset alarm status Alarm status list Reset the number of times an alarm has been triggered to
button 0, and the accumulated time in alarm to 0, for all alarms.
Silence alarms Silence the audio indicator for all current alarms (Windows
button 200 and Windows XP applications only).
Sort alarms Alarm list Toggle between sorting alarms in alarm lists and the alarm
button log file by time and by trigger value.
Diagnostics clear Diagnostics list Remove the selected message from all diagnostics lists.
button
Diagnostics clear Diagnostics list Remove all diagnostics messages from all diagnostic lists.
all button
Information Information Acknowledge the current message in the display.
acknowledge Message display
button
For more information about using the buttons with lists and trends, see
the topics on these pages:
Numeric input enable Enter a numeric value and then write the value to
button a tag or an expression, or ramp a value at the data
source. For details, see page 27-5.
Numeric input cursor Enter a numeric value and then write the value to
point a tag or an expression, or ramp a value at the data
source. For details, see page 27-5.
String input enable Enter a string value and then write the value to a
button tag. For details, see page 27-12.
Numeric display Display numeric tag values. For example, display
the current temperature of an oven. For details,
see page 16-104
String display Display string tag values. For example, set up the
data source to generate strings that report on the
state of a process of operation, or that provide the
operator with instructions about what to do next.
For details, see page 16-135
ActiveX object Enter or display data using a third-party object
connected to an analog, digital, or string tag. The
format of the data entered or displayed depends
on the object. For details, see page 15-28.
Before you can create an object, you must select the object’s tool, either
by clicking a menu item or by clicking the tool on the toolbar. When
you position a cursor over a tool on the toolbar, the name of the tool
is displayed in a tooltip and in the status bar.
To select a tool
Click the tool on the toolbar or on the Objects menu. When you
click a tool, the pointer changes to show which tool is active.
To size and position objects precisely as you create them, use the grid.
On the View menu, click Show Grid, and then click Snap On.
ActiveX objects and some drawing objects require extra steps to create
them. For details about creating drawing objects, see the next section.
For information about ActiveX objects, see page 15-28.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the object, and then
drag to draw a rectangle the general size you want the object to be.
4. In the dialog box, specify how the object looks, its behavior, and
controls. For more information about the Properties dialog box,
see page 15-37.
You can also use the Property Panel to set up objects. For
information about using the Property Panel, see page 15-42.
You can also use the Property Panel to set up objects. For information
about using the Property Panel, see page 15-42.
Creating text
Choosing fonts
You can select any font you have installed, but TrueType™ and
OpenType® fonts are recommended. These fonts can be resized easily,
without losing text quality.
If you run an application on a computer that does not have the fonts
you used when setting up the application, Windows substitutes with the
fonts that most closely match the fonts you specified.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the text, and then drag
Text tool
to draw a rectangle.
5. Make your choices in the dialog box that opens, and then click OK.
6. In the General tab, specify how the text looks and the font to use:
Font, size, and style Click a font for the text in the Font list. Type
or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to make the font
bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Or, click the Browse button to open the Font dialog box and set up
Browse button
font attributes.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text’s
background.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text.
Size to fit Check this box to resize the text object so that all the
text you type appears in the display. Clear the box if you want the
text to be cropped within the object’s bounding box.
After you’ve set up one text object to look the way you want, copy and
paste it to create additional text objects with the same formatting. Then
edit the text of the new objects.
2. In the Text box, click where you want to make the change. To
delete text characters, use the Backspace and Delete keys.
Creating images
Use the image graphic object to place bitmap and JPEG images in your
graphic displays.
Before you can place a bitmap or JPEG image in a display, you must
import the image into your application. For more information, see
page 14-28.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the image, and then
drag to draw a rectangle.
Image tool
The Image Browser opens.
3. In the Select image list, click the image to add, and then click OK.
The image is placed where you drew the rectangle, but the actual
size of the image is used, rather than the size of the rectangle you
drew.
Creating panels
Panels support visibility animation only.
To create a panel
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the panel, and then
Panel tool
drag to draw a rectangle the general size you want the panel to be.
3. To change how the panel looks, double-click the panel to open the
Panel Properties dialog box.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the object, and then
Arc tool
drag to draw an ellipse or circle.
When you release the mouse button, a set of handles appears so you
can decrease the angle of the wedge or arc from 360 degrees to the
desired angle.
3. Click a handle, and drag the mouse to ‘cut out’ part of the circle.
For example, if the shape you created has a solid background and
you don’t want the shape to be filled, select the transparent
background style.
You can also use the Arc and Wedge tools to reshape arcs and wedges.
For more information, see page 15-66.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the object, and then
Ellipse tool
drag to draw an ellipse or circle of the desired size.
Freehand tool
2. Click and drag to create the shape you want.
For example, if the shape you created has a solid background and
you don’t want the shape to be filled, select the transparent
background style.
Creating lines
To create a line
2. Click where you want the line to start, and then drag from the
Line tool
beginning point to the end point.
To draw horizontal or vertical lines, hold down Ctrl while you drag
the mouse.
3. To change how the line looks, right-click the line and then click
Properties on the context menu. The Line Properties dialog box
opens.
You can use the Polyline tool to convert the line into a polyline. For
more information, see page 15-66.
2. Click and drag to create the first segment of the object. Release the
Polygon tool
mouse button.
To draw horizontal or vertical lines, hold down Ctrl while you drag.
Polyline tool
For example, if the shape you created has a solid background and
you don't want the shape to be filled, select the transparent
background style.
You can use the Polygon tool to reshape lines, polygons, polylines, and
rectangles. For more information, see page 15-66.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the object, and then
Rectangle tool
drag until the rectangle or square is the size you want.
You can use the Polygon tool to reshape the rectangle into a polygon.
For more information, see page 15-66.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the object, and then
Rounded rectangle tool
drag until the rectangle or square is the size you want.
You can change how rounded the corners are by using the handle
that appears inside the rounded rectangle. Click the handle and drag
inward to increase roundedness, or outward to decrease
roundedness.
2. Click the mouse where you want to position the file, and then drag
to draw a rectangle the general size you want the final object to be.
4. Navigate to the directory where the file is stored, and then click the
file to import.
The file is converted to drawing objects and grouped, and then the
grouped object is placed in the graphic display.
3. In the dialog box that opens, click the object to add to your graphic
display. The list of objects depends on the software you have
installed.
If an object you have installed does not appear in the list, the object
might not be registered.
5. To remove an object from the list, select the object, and then click
Unregister.
6. Click OK.
11. To close the Properties dialog box, click OK. To close the Property
Panel, click the Close button.
For information about using the Properties dialog box, see page 15-37.
For information about using the Property Panel, see page 15-42.
This section describes features of the Graphic Displays editor that help
you work with the objects you create. It describes how to:
color objects.
name objects.
For information about using the Object Explorer, see page 15-32.
To select Do this
To deselect Do this
Use the Object Explorer to view and select objects from a tree-list of
all the objects in a display. Groups are listed as expandable items in the
tree, with a + icon.
Use the Object Explorer to select an object that is hidden behind other
objects in the display, without bringing the object to the front. Objects
are listed in front-to-back order. The object you created most recently
is at the front, unless you move it back using the Send to Back option.
For more information about layering objects, see page 15-72.
You can also use the Object Explorer to highlight objects by object
type, highlight objects that have animation attached, and to highlight
objects with specific tag or expression assignments. For more
information, see page 15-32.
You can keep the Object Explorer open as you work in the Graphic
Displays editor.
Click the + icon next to the group name, or double-click the group
name.
The list expands to show the objects and groups within the group.
The objects are highlighted in red in the Object Explorer and in the
graphic display. If your graphic display uses a red background, the
highlighting is not visible in the graphic display.
2. To highlight one or more object types, click the check boxes in the
By object type list.
Each object that has one or more of the specified animation types
assigned will be highlighted.
The list displays all the tags and expressions that have been assigned
to objects in the graphic display, except tags contained in embedded
variables.
5. Click OK.
If an object can have more than one state, the object’s Properties
dialog box contains a States tab.
The trend and gauge objects have unique tabs that are not listed in
the table above.
Select the object, and then on the Edit menu, click Properties.
In the Property Panel, with the object selected, click the (Custom)
Browse button
property and then click the Browse button.
This button is available once you make changes in the dialog box. Click it to
apply your changes without closing the dialog box. When you click a different
tab, the changes in the current tab are applied automatically.
Use the Property Panel to modify the properties of graphic objects and
assign tags and expressions to the objects.
You can keep the Property Panel open as you work in the Graphic
Displays editor. You can drag the panel’s borders to make the Property
Panel larger or smaller.
Setting up properties
Use the Property Panel’s Properties tab to set up the properties of the
selected object or objects.
To view all the properties of all the selected objects, click All
Properties.
When you first select a group object, the Property Panel displays the
group properties only, such as the group’s name and height. To view
and edit the properties of the individual objects within the group, click
Include Grouped Objects.
If the property has a list of values associated with it, pressing Enter
or double-clicking in the property’s row changes the property’s
value to the next available value. A down-arrow appears in the right
column. Click it to see the options for the property.
If the property has a dialog box (such as the Font dialog box)
associated with it, double-clicking the row opens the dialog box. Or,
a Browse button appears in the right column-click it to open the
dialog box.
4. Type the new value for the property, select one from the list, or
make selections from the dialog box.
5. Press Enter or click another cell in the grid to save the change. The
selected object is updated with the new property value and its
appearance in the display changes, if appropriate.
The arrows indicate the direction in which the data flows between the
control and the data source:
A right arrow indicates that the control sends values to the data
source. The control is a write control.
A double arrow indicates that the data flows in both directions. The
control is a read-write control.
The arrows show the direction in which data flows between the
control and the data source. If the control is a read control (arrow
points left), data flows from the data source to the object. If the
control is a write control (arrow points right), data flows from the
object to the data source. If the control is a read and write control
(double-headed arrow), data flows in both directions.
1. Select an object.
To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, click the Browse button
in the Tag column. For information about using the Tag Browser,
see page 7-31.
This table lists the color properties you can assign using the color
toolbars:
For objects with states, the selected color is applied to the current
state’s color properties only. In the Property Panel, properties that
apply to states have “St_” at the beginning of the property name.
For all the drawing objects except image and panel, you can select
colors from the color toolbars before you draw an object (either before
or after you click the object’s tool).
The other objects are always drawn using their default colors, but you
can select the objects and then click the toolbars to change their colors.
The toolbars are especially useful for quickly assigning the same colors
to multiple objects.
You can also assign colors using an object’s Properties dialog box or the
Property Panel. Use one of these methods if you want to assign
separate colors to different foreground or background color
properties, or to choose colors that don’t appear in the toolbars.
For example, if you want to use a dark blue background color for a
button, with a light blue background color for its image label, you must
assign the colors separately. Using the toolbar would assign the same
color to both properties.
Also use the Properties dialog box or Property Panel to change the
default colors for properties that cannot be assigned using the color
toolbars.
The object name appears in the status bar, diagnostics bar, Property
Panel, and Object Explorer in RSView Studio, and in diagnostics log
messages at run time.
The name must start with a letter, and cannot contain spaces. You
can use the underscore character (_).
The name must start with a letter, and cannot contain spaces. You can
use the underscore character (_).
To make sure the different states for an object are set up correctly, you
can view them using the States toolbar or the Property Panel.
If you selected multiple objects, the toolbar shows the states that are
common to all the objects.
3. To view the next state, select it in the toolbar or press the Down
Arrow key on your keyboard.
You can also use these keys to select the next state to view:
2. In the Property Panel, click the State property and then select the
state to view.
3. To view the next state quickly, double-click the row, or press the
Enter key on your keyboard.
use tag placeholders so the same display can be used with different
sets of tags.
Type the tag name here... ...or click the button to open the Tag Browser.
Select the object, and then on the Edit menu click Connections.
Assign tags in the Connections tab of the Properties dialog box.
Type the expression here... ...or click the button to open the Expression editor..
In the Exprn column click the Browse button and then create an
expression in the Expression editor. Use this method if you want to
check the expression syntax, or to use multiple lines for the
expression.
a folder name.
To replace tags
To select all the objects in the display, on the Edit menu, click Select
All.
To replace the tags for a single object, you can right-click it and then
click Tag Substitution.
3. In the Search for box, type the name of the tag, folder, or
expression to replace, or click an item in the list box.
The list box lists the tags and expressions assigned in the graphic
display.
To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, click the Browse button.
To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, click the Browse button.
Browse button
5. To confirm each replacement before it is made, check Confirm
replacements.
6. Click Replace.
To move to the next object that uses the text string, click Next.
To replace the text for all the objects in the dialog box, click Replace
All.
8. When all replacements are done, click Cancel to close the Confirm
Replacements dialog box. (It closes automatically if you click
Replace All.)
For example, suppose you are creating displays for a plant that cans
corn and peas. The machinery used in both processes is identical.
Instead of creating two displays and specifying corn-related tags in one
display and pea-related tags in another, you can create one display and
not specify any tag names. Where a tag name is required, type a tag
placeholder.
You can use tag placeholders wherever you would normally assign a tag
to an object, including in expressions and embedded variables. You can
also use tag placeholders in the expressions you create to animate
objects.
the graphic display that opens when the application is first run.
The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name, including folder
names. For example, you could create a parameter file specifying that
the tag placeholder #1=Folder1. You could assign the folder and a tag
name to a graphic object's control: #1\Tag1.
Once you have drawn an object, you can select the object and work
with it. You can:
move objects.
copy objects.
duplicate objects.
resize objects.
delete objects.
Moving objects
You can move objects using the mouse or the keyboard. The keys give
you fine positioning, allowing you to move objects in small increments.
You can also use the grid to position objects precisely.
Another option is to position an object using the object’s Top and Left
properties in the Property Panel. For information about using the
Property Panel, see page 15-42.
Once you’ve moved objects into position, you might want to align
other objects with them, or lock them into place. For information
about aligning objects, see page 15-74. For information about locking
objects into position, see page 15-81.
On the View menu, select Snap On. A check mark appears beside
the menu item when the option is selected.
To adjust the amount of the increment, first hold down the Shift key
and press the + or - keys on the keyboard’s numeric keypad.
Copying objects
To copy objects, you can:
3. When the object is where you want it, release the mouse button
and then the Ctrl key.
If you selected several objects, dragging one of the objects copies all
the selected objects. The objects maintain their position relative to
each other.
If you selected several objects, dragging one of the objects copies all the
selected objects. The objects maintain their position relative to each
other.
You can cut, copy, or paste objects using the menu items on the Edit
menu or the buttons on the toolbar.
Once you cut or copy an object, you can paste it anywhere in the
drawing area of:
2. On the Edit menu, click Cut or Copy, or click the Cut or Copy tool
Cut tool
on the Graphics toolbar.
To paste objects
2. On the Edit menu, click Paste, or click the Paste tool on the
Paste tool
Graphics toolbar.
Duplicating objects
Resizing objects
You can resize objects using the mouse or using the keyboard. The keys
let you resize objects in small increments. You can also use the grid to
resize objects precisely.
Another option is to size an object using the object’s Height and Width
properties in the Property Panel. This method is especially useful for
quickly resizing multiple objects to the same size. For information
about using the Property Panel, see page 15-42.
On the View menu, select Snap On. A check mark appears beside
the menu item when the option is selected.
3. Drag the handle until the object is the desired size or shape.
For perfect circles and squares, press Ctrl and hold the key down
while you drag a corner handle.
3. Hold down Shift and press an arrow key until the object is the
desired size.
To adjust the amount of the increment, first hold down the Shift key
and press the + or - keys on the keyboard's numeric keypad.
2. Click the Polygon tool, or right-click the object and then click Edit.
Polygon tool
The cursor changes to the Polygon tool, and handles appear on the
object.
5. To delete an angle, position the pointer at the tip of the angle, and
then press Delete.
2. Click the Arc or Wedge tool, or right-click the object and then click
Arc tool
Edit.
The cursor changes to the Arc or Wedge tool, and handles appear
Wedge tool on the object.
A cross-hair appears.
To delete objects
The handles around the group are replaced with handles around
each object.
Edit a group the same way you would edit an individual object. You
can:
use the Property Panel to apply the same properties to all the
members of the group at once. For example, change the line width
of all objects in the group to 2 pixels.
for objects with states, use the States toolbar to cycle through the
states and apply the same properties to the states for each object in
the group at once. When you select a group containing objects with
states, only the states that are common to all objects in the group
appear in the toolbar.
When the hatched border is around the group, you are in group edit
mode. In this mode, you can select individual objects in the group
and modify them.
The status bar and Object Explorer indicate which object or group
is selected.
You can change the selected object’s shape, size, or position, or use
the object’s Properties dialog box or the Property Panel to edit the
object’s properties.
Arranging objects
You can arrange objects (or groups of objects) in a number of ways.
You can:
Layering objects
You can layer objects (or groups of objects) on top of each other.
Objects are layered in the order they are created, with the most recently
created object on top. Change the layer order with Send to Back and
Bring to Front.
You can also select a concealed object easily by clicking the object
in the Object Explorer.
1. Select an object.
You can align objects (or groups of objects) with each other and with
the grid.
To align objects
On the View menu, select Snap On. A check mark appears beside
the menu item when the option is selected.
Align top
Align middle
Align bottom
Spacing objects
With Space Vertical and Space Horizontal, objects (or groups of
objects) are moved vertically or horizontally to have the same amount
of space from the center point of each object.
Centers are
separated by an equal
vertical distance.
Centers are
separated by an equal
horizontal distance.
Flip Vertical
2. On the Arrange menu, click a Flip menu item, or click a tool on the
Graphics toolbar:
You can attach rotation animation to the same drawing objects. With
rotation animation, the object rotates around an anchor point to
indicate a tag’s value at run time. For details about rotation animation,
see page 17-30.
When you rotate text, it rotates around the anchor point but the text
itself remains upright.
4. Click an edge of the object and drag in the direction you want to
rotate it.
You can lock graphic objects (or groups of objects) into position by
converting them to wallpaper. Once you convert objects to wallpaper,
you cannot select or edit them unless you unlock the wallpaper.
Wallpaper objects cannot be animated at run time.
If the grid is on, wallpaper objects are positioned behind the grid.
If you just want to lock the objects into place while you’re working in
the display, unlock the wallpaper when you’re finished. If you want to
use the wallpaper objects as a background for your display, leave the
wallpaper locked.
For more information about creating a background for your display, see
page 14-20.
For a single object, you can right-click it and then click Convert to
Wallpaper.
On the Edit menu, select Wallpaper, and then click Unlock All
Wallpaper.
All objects in the graphic display are converted back to their original
state.
ensure values are read by the data source before sending new values.
For objects that are not described in other chapters of the manual, this
chapter provides information about how to use the objects.
For information about creating and setting up the trend graphic object,
see Chapter 18.
name
visibility
For ActiveX and trend objects, you can also set up these properties:
focus highlight
key navigation
Height Type the number of pixels for the height of the object. The
height includes the object’s borders.
Width Type the number of pixels for the width of the object. The
width includes the object’s borders.
Top Type the number of pixels from the top of the display to
position the object. You can type a positive or negative number. If
you use a negative number, part or all of the object is off the display.
Left Type the number of pixels from the left of the display to
position the object. You can type a positive or negative number. If
you use a negative number, part or all of the object is off the display.
Name Type a name for the object. The name must start with a
letter, and cannot contain spaces. You can use numbers and the
underscore character (_) in the name.
If you don’t specify a name for the object, the default name is used
in the status bar, Diagnostics List, Property Panel, and Object
Explorer in RSView Studio, and in diagnostics messages at run
time.
Clear the check box if you don’t want the object to display a
highlight box at run time.
Clear the check box if you don’t want the operator to navigate to the
object using the keyboard.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional state, including the error
state if the object has one.
To simplify setting up states when many of the properties are the same,
you can copy and paste settings from one state to another.
1. In the Select state box, click the state whose settings you want to
copy.
3. In the Copy State Settings dialog box, select the settings to copy.
Clear the check boxes for settings you don’t want to copy, or click
Clear All to clear all the check boxes and then specify the settings
to copy.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Select state box, click the state to which to paste the settings.
7. In the Paste State Settings dialog box, specify whether to paste the
settings to the selected (current) state only, or to all the object’s
states.
8. Click OK.
ensure that tag values are read by the data source before sending
new values.
Use touch margins for buttons that are positioned close together, to
ensure that the adjacent button is not pressed by mistake.
You can create touch margins at the top and bottom of the button, at
the sides, or on all four sides.
The margins at the top and The margins at the left and
bottom edges are called right edges are called
vertical touch margins. horizontal touch margins.
If the object’s shape is a circle or ellipse, the touch margin applies to the
object’s bounding box, not the object’s border. The bounding box is an
invisible square or rectangle that surrounds the object. When you select
the object, the selection handles show the location of the bounding
box.
The invisible
bounding box is just
inside the selection
handles.
In the General tab of the button’s Properties dialog box, type the
number of pixels for the touch margins in the Horizontal margin
and Vertical margin boxes.
Where possible, use the same function keys for the same operations
in all your graphic displays. For example, if every display contains a
goto display button that returns the operator to a graphic display
called Main Menu, assign the same function key to this button in
each display.
For buttons with multiple states, include the function key name in
the caption for each state, or create a text object to use as a label for
the button (so that you don’t have to set up the caption for each
state), and then group the text and button together.
At run time, the operator presses the key combination to activate the
object to which the function key is assigned.
The list shows all the buttons in the graphic display to which a
function key can be assigned, and indicates which keys have already
been assigned.
The assigned key appears after the button name in the list.
In the Key Assignment Properties dialog box, select the button and
then select a new function key.
lists: control list selector, display list selector, diagnostics list, alarm
list, and alarm status list
alarm banner
trends
For ActiveX and trend objects, you can specify whether or not to
display a highlight box in the object’s Properties dialog box, on the
Common tab. For more information about setting up options on the
Common tab, see page 16-4.
If the Disable Highlight When Object has Focus box is checked (in the
Display Settings dialog box), that setting overrides the setting you
specify in the Common tab.
When an object’s key navigation is turned off, the operator can still
select the object using a mouse or touch screen, if available.
By default, key navigation is turned off for the numeric input enable
buttons and string input enable buttons. You can turn on keyboard
navigation if you want the operator to use the keyboard to navigate to
these objects.
For ActiveX and trend objects, in the Common tab of the object’s
Properties dialog box, clear the Key navigation box for off. Check
the box for on.
If you are creating small graphic displays that don’t have much room,
you might prefer to use one set of buttons to work with all the graphic
objects (that accept input focus) in the display.
By default, the buttons are set up to work with whichever object has
input focus (is selected) in the display.
However, if space isn’t a concern, you can create multiple copies of the
buttons you want to use and link them to specific objects. One benefit
of linking a button to a specific object is that the operator doesn’t have
to select the object before pressing the button. Another benefit is that
you can position the buttons close to the specified object, making it
2. In the General tab, in the “Send press to” box, select Linked
Object.
3. To select from a list of all the objects in the display that you can
link the button to, click the Browse button next to the Linked
object box.
Once you have linked buttons to an object, you might want to turn off
the object’s key navigation, since this option is no longer needed. For
details, see page 16-17.
A button press occurs when the operator clicks an object with the
mouse, presses it on a touch screen, or presses the function key
associated with the object. Auto repeat works with all these methods of
pressing buttons.
Multistate push Sends the value for the next state to the data
source. External changes to the Value control are
not recognized when the button is in auto repeat
mode.
Ramp Sends the new ramped value to the data source.
External changes to the Value control are not
recognized when the button is in auto repeat
mode.
Move up Moves the highlight up an item in the list, scrolls
up in the trend, or ramps the numeric input
cursor point or numeric input enable button
value.
Move down Moves the highlight down an item in the list,
scrolls down in the trend, or ramps the numeric
input cursor point or numeric input enable
button value.
Page up Moves the highlight up a page in the list.
Page down Moves the highlight down a page in the list.
Move left Scrolls the trend to the left.
Move right Scrolls the trend to the right.
For each button that uses auto repeat, you can specify these properties:
In the Timing tab of the button’s Properties dialog box, specify the
Auto repeat rate and Auto repeat delay properties.
5. In the Keyboard Repeat Settings, click a repeat delay, and then type
a repeat rate.
6. Click OK.
The auto repeat settings are for the physical left and right membrane
keypads only. You cannot configure the on-screen, alphanumeric input
panel.
To ensure a value is read by the data source before the operator sends
a new value, use Enter key handshaking. While Enter key handshaking
is in effect for an object, the operator cannot send a new value to the
object’s Value control.
You can use Enter key handshaking with these graphic objects:
There are two ways you can use Enter key handshaking:
to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time.
to hold the value at the data source until the data source notifies
RSView that the value has been read.
Choose the method that best suits your application needs and
communication system.
1. When the operator presses the Enter button, the value is sent to
the Value control and the “Enter key control delay” timer begins
timing. (The use of a delay is optional.)
2. If you specify an Enter key control delay, when the time is up, the
Enter control is set to 1. If you don’t use the delay, the Enter
control is set to 1 as soon as the operator presses Enter.
3. When the Enter control is set to 1, the “Enter key hold time” timer
begins timing.
4. When the Enter key hold time has expired, the Enter control is
reset to 0 and the operator can send a new value to the Value
control.
How the Enter handshake control resets the Enter control depends on
which Handshake reset type you select:
Set up the data source to send a non-zero value to the Enter handshake
control when it has read the new value at the Value control, and then
to reset the Enter handshake control to 0.
If you use the Enter handshake control, handshaking works like this:
1. When the operator presses the Enter button, the value is sent to
the Value control and the “Enter key control delay” timer begins
timing. (The use of a delay is optional.)
2. If you specify an Enter key control delay, when the time is up, the
Enter control is set to 1. If you don’t use the delay, the Enter
control is set to 1 as soon as the operator presses Enter.
4. The Enter control remains set until the Enter key handshake time
expires or until reset by the Enter handshake control, whichever
happens first.
5. The Enter control is reset to 0 and the operator can send a new
value to the Value control.
You can also use the Property Panel to specify the properties and assign
tags to the controls.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
In the Label tab, specify what text or image to display on the button.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Browse button
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
Move left Trend Pause the trend and scroll to the left.
button
Move right Trend Pause the trend and scroll to the right.
button
Move down Lists, trend, List—move down one item in the list.
button and
Trend—scroll down to display lower values
numeric
on the vertical scale.
input
objects Numeric input cursor point and numeric
input enable button—ramp the value down.
Move up Lists, List—move up one item in the list.
button trends, and
Trend—scroll up to display higher values on
numeric
the vertical scale.
input
objects Numeric input cursor point and numeric
input enable button—ramp the value up.
Page down Lists Move down one page in the list.
button
Page up Lists Move up one page in the list.
button
Acknowled Alarm list Acknowledge and silence the selected alarm.
ge alarm Alarm For details, see page 9-56.
button banner
Clear alarm Alarm Clear the alarm in the alarm banner without
banner banner removing the alarm from the alarm log file
button and alarm lists. For details, see page 9-59.
Alarm Alarm Change the type of alarms displayed in the
status mode status list alarm status list, from all alarms to active
button alarms to past alarms. For details, see
page 9-60.
Diagnostics Diagnostics Remove the selected message from all
clear button list diagnostics lists.
diagnostics lists
trends
Using buttons with alarm lists, alarm banners, and alarm Page 9-53
status lists
Using buttons with diagnostics lists Page 10-26
Using buttons with trends Page 18-30
This section shows how to set up the move up button, but you can use
these instructions to set up any of the buttons in the table.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Send press to Select Object With Focus to send the button’s press
action to the object that is selected on the display.
Select Linked Object to send the button’s press action to the object to
which the button is linked.
Linked object Click the Browse button, and then click the object you
Browse button
want to link the button to.
In the Label tab, specify what text or image to display on the button.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Browse button
Image back style Click Solid to cover the button’s background
behind the image. Click Transparent to allow the button’s background
to show through spaces in the image.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
In the Timing tab, set up whether or not the button press repeats
automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down.
You can also set up the rate at which the button press repeats.
Auto repeat rate Select the number of times per second a button
press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode. If you
don’t want the button press to repeat automatically, select 0.
Auto repeat delay Click the number of milliseconds or seconds the
button must remain pressed before auto repeat starts.
You can use different kinds of push buttons, depending on what kind
of machinery you are running or process you are controlling:
Momentary push buttons change a tag to one value when the button
is pressed, and another value when the button is released. The machine
is on only while the button is held down. When the button is released,
the machine turns off. Momentary push buttons are useful for jogging
a motor, and they can be set up to start and stop a machine or process.
Maintained push buttons toggle between two values. This type of
button is useful for changing a setting within a machine or process, but
not for starting the machine or process. For example, use the
maintained push button for changing modes, such as Auto to Manual,
or Metric to Imperial.
Latched push buttons latch in the on position, and must be unlatched
by another button or process to return to the off position. This type of
button is useful for starting a machine or process.
Multistate push buttons allow an operator to cycle through multiple
options consecutively, using a single button. The current state of a
process or operation is displayed on the button by a different color,
caption, or image for each state.
Interlocked push buttons work in groups, and share the same tag.
The buttons work together like the preset station selector buttons on a
car radio: pressing one button cancels another. Although interlocked
push buttons work as a group, you add them to the display one at a
time.
Ramp buttons increase or decrease the value of a tag by either an
integer or floating-point value. You can use two ramp buttons together
to create an increase/decrease control, for example for the speed of a
The momentary push button’s states can perform one of three kinds of
actions:
Change the Value control to a value you specify. You assign the
desired values to the button’s press and release actions. For example,
50 when pressed, and 100 when released.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border width Type a number to change the thickness of the button’s
border. Border width is measured in pixels.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color on
the States tab.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Back style Click Solid to cover objects or the display background
behind the button. Click Transparent to allow objects or the display
background behind the button to show through.
Click Normally closed to change the button’s tag to 0 when the button
is pressed, and 1 when the button is released.
Click Value to specify values for each of the button’s states. Type values
on the States tab, described on page 16-52.
Hold time Select the amount of time the button remains pressed
before the release action takes effect, even if the operator releases the
button sooner.
The hold time should reflect network traffic. Increasing the hold time
prevents a very quick object press from being missed by the
programmable controller. If you are using a memory tag, click the
shortest hold time.
The operator cannot press the object again until the hold time has
expired. If a display change occurs before the hold time has expired, the
value for the released state is sent immediately to the tag.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Value The value to which the button changes the Value control when
the selected state is in effect. When the Indicator control changes to
If you selected Value for the button action on the General tab, you can
type a value for the state in this box. You cannot type a value for the
button’s error state.
If you selected Normally open for the button action on the General tab,
state 0 has a value of 0, and state 1 has a value of 1. You cannot change
these values.
If you selected Normally closed for the button action on the General
tab, state 0 has a value of 1, and state 1 has a value of 0. You cannot
change these values.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
If you select the Border uses back color option, on the General tab, the
border color you specify here is not used. Instead, the back color is
used.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Caption back style Click Solid to cover the button’s background
(such as a graphic image) behind the text. Click Transparent to allow
the button's background to show through between the letters.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
Browse button
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image back style Click Solid to cover the button’s background
behind the image. Click Transparent to allow the button’s background
to show through spaces in the image.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image blink Check this box to make a monochrome image blink at
run time. Clear the check box to prevent the image from blinking at run
time. You cannot make grayscale or color images blink.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
Value The Value control triggers the button’s action. For example,
when the tag assigned to the control is set to 1, the data source starts a
motor.
Indicator The Indicator control provides visual feedback to the
button of its state. For example, the control can show whether a motor
is running. If you assign this control, the button does not display the
pressed state until it receives a response from the Indicator control. Set
up the data source to change the Indicator control’s value when it has
read the Value control’s value.
When pressed the first time, the maintained push button changes a tag
to one value. When pressed and released a second time, the button
changes the tag to another value.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time, and
how the button changes state.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color on
the States tab.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Next state based on Click Current state to toggle the button’s state
relative to its current state. For example, if the button’s current state is
0, its next state is 1. If the button's current state is 1, its next state is 0.
Click Value control to toggle the button’s state relative to the Value
control. If the operator presses the button, changing its state to 1, and
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button. If the computer running the display
does not have an internal speaker, pressing the button does not trigger
a beep.
The error state is also displayed when the display containing the
maintained push button first opens, if the Value control’s value does
not match one of the state values you set up.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
If you select the Border uses back color option, on the General tab, the
border color you specify here is not used. Instead, the back color is
used.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Browse button
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
Value The Value control triggers the button’s action. For example,
when the tag assigned to the control is set to 1, the data source changes
the machine to Auto mode.
RSView reads the Value control when the “Next state based on” option
is set to Value control.
Indicator The Indicator control provides visual feedback to the
button of its state. For example, the control can show which mode a
machine is using. If you assign this control, the button does not display
the pressed state until it receives a response from the Indicator control.
Set up the data source to change the Indicator control’s value when it
has read the Value control’s value.
Latched push buttons work like momentary push buttons, except that
the tag doesn’t change to the button’s release value until the button is
unlatched by another button or process. This type of button is useful
for starting a machine or process.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time, and
how to unlatch it.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color on
the States tab.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Latch reset type To unlatch the push button when the Handshake
control has a non-zero value, click Non-zero Value.
To unlatch the push button when the Handshake control changes from
a 0 to a non-zero value, click Zero to Non-zero transition.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
the Indicator control’s value does not match one of the state values
you set up.
Value The value to which the button changes the Value control when
the selected state is in effect. When the Indicator control changes to
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
Caption color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s text.
Caption back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s background.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image back style Click Solid to cover the button’s background
behind the image. Click Transparent to allow the button’s background
to show through spaces in the image.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image blink Check this box to make a monochrome image blink at
run time. Clear the check box to prevent the image from blinking at run
time. You cannot make grayscale or color images blink.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
Value The Value control triggers the button’s action. For example,
when the tag assigned to the control is set to 1, the data source starts a
motor.
Indicator The Indicator control provides visual feedback to the
button of its state. For example, the control can show whether a motor
is running. If you assign this control, the button does not display the
pressed state until it receives a response from the Indicator control. Set
up the data source to change the Indicator control’s value when it has
read the Value control’s value.
Handshake To unlatch the button, the Handshake control works with
the “Latch reset type” setting (on the General tab, see page 16-68).
Each time the operator presses the button, the tag changes to the value
for the next state. When the button is in its last state and the operator
presses the button, the button returns to its first state.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like, and how the
button changes state.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color on
the States tab.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Number of states Click the number of states you want the button to
have.
Next state based on When the operator presses the button, the next
state that is displayed can be based on the current state, or on the value
of the Value control.
Click Value control to use the Value control as the basis for deciding
what the next state will be. With this method, other devices can change
the Value control’s value, and determine what the button’s next state
will be.
If the Value control does not match one of the button’s state values, the
button changes to State 0, and changes the Value control to the value
of State 0.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
the Indicator control’s value does not match one of the state values
you set up.
Value The value to which the button changes the Value control when
the selected state is in effect. When the Indicator control changes to
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Caption back style Click Solid to cover the button’s background
(such as a graphic image) behind the text. Click Transparent to allow
the button’s background to show through between the letters.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
In the Timing tab, set up whether or not the button press repeats
automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down.
You can also set up the rate at which the button press repeats.
Auto repeat rate Select the number of times per second a button
press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode. If you
don’t want the button press to repeat automatically, select 0.
In the Connections tab, specify the tags or expression with which the
button exchanges data. For information about assigning tags and
expressions, see page 15-52.
Value The Value control triggers the button’s action. For example,
when the tag assigned to the control changes to the next state, the data
source changes the speed of a conveyor belt.
The buttons work together like the preset station selector buttons on a
car radio: pressing one button cancels another. Although interlocked
push buttons work as a group, you add them to the display one at a
time.
When the operator presses one of the interlocked push buttons, the tag
assigned to its Value control changes to one value. When the operator
presses a different interlocked push button, the tag changes to another
value. Assign the same tag to each button’s Value control.
You can also use a single interlocked push button to send a value to a
tag.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color on
the States tab.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Back style Click Solid to cover objects or the display background
behind the button. Click Transparent to allow objects or the display
background behind the button to show through.
Shape Click a shape for the button.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the caption in the Font list.
Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to make the
font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Caption color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s text.
Caption back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s background.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
When the Value control changes to a value that doesn’t match the
button’s value, the button changes to state 0.
Each time the operator presses the button, the tag changes to the next
highest or next lowest value, depending on how you set up the button.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like, and whether the
button ramps a value up or down.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
Auto repeat rate Select the number of times per second a button
press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode. If you
don’t want the button press to repeat automatically, select 0.
Auto repeat delay Click the number of milliseconds or seconds the
button must remain pressed before auto repeat starts.
In the Connections tab, specify the tag with which the button
exchanges data. Ramp buttons have no Indicator control. For
information about assigning tags, see page 15-52.
Value The Value control triggers the button’s action. For example,
when the tag assigned to the control is increased, the data source
increases a motor’s speed.
The numeric display shows the value of the Value control at the data
source. The value shown depends on whether the Value control value
is a floating-point number or an integer. Integer values are displayed as
is. Floating-point values are rounded to fit the display.
For more information about how values are rounded, see page 7-3.
The numeric display uses the number format you set up on the run-
time computer. For example, if the run-time computer is set up to use
a comma for the decimal symbol, the numeric display uses a comma for
the decimal symbol.
If the integer portion of the value, including the decimal point and
minus sign, contains more digits than specified for the display, the
numeric display is filled with asterisks.
If the value doesn’t fit on the first line of the display, and there is
room for a second line, the value continues onto the second line.
Clear the check box if you want the numeric display’s border to have a
different color than the numeric display’s background, and then choose
a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the numeric
display’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
numeric display’s border.
Back style Click Solid to cover objects or the display background
behind the numeric display. Click Transparent to allow objects or the
display background behind the numeric display to show through.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the numeric display.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text in
the numeric display.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the numeric display’s text in the
Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to
make the font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline
the text.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the numeric display.
In the default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the numeric display.
Value The Value control’s value is shown in the numeric display. For
example, the numeric display can show the temperature of an oven.
Polarity The Polarity control determines whether or not a minus sign
is displayed. A minus sign is displayed when this control has a positive
non-zero value.
The operator can press the numeric input enable button to open a
numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad. The operator can enter a
number in the keypad or scratchpad, and then send the number to the
data source.
For more information about using the numeric input enable button
with the numeric pop-up windows, see page 27-5.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time,
whether the operator can navigate to the cursor point using the keys on
the keyboard or keypad, and whether the operator can press the button
to give it focus.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Key navigation Check this box to allow the operator to navigate to
the button and give it focus using the keyboard.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Browse button
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
The keypad is larger than the scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the
run-time computer must have an external keyboard or keypad.
To use the button as a ramp button, ensure that the operator has a way
to give the button focus. On the General tab, select Key navigation,
Take focus on press, or both.
Select Fixed Position if the values to enter in the pop-up window always
have the same number of digits after the decimal point. If you select
this type of decimal point, specify a “Digits after decimal” value.
Value When the operator presses the pop-up window’s Enter key, the
numeric value the operator enters is sent to the Value control. For
example, the operator could enter a value to change the fill level for a
tank.
If the button is set up as a ramp button, when the operator gives the
button focus and presses a move up or move down button (or the Up
Arrow or Down Arrow key on the keyboard), the value at the Value
control is increased or decreased by the Ramp value amount. For
example, the operator could ramp the button to increase an oven’s
temperature 5 degrees.
If you do not assign a tag to this control, at run time when the operator
presses the button the pop-up keypad or scratchpad does not open.
Optional Expression The Optional Expression control is an
optional write control. Assign a write expression to this control. When
the operator enters a value, the expression’s logic is performed on the
value, and the result is sent to the Value control.
Use this control for Enter key handshaking if you want to reset the
Enter control when a value in the programmable controller changes.
For more information about using the numeric input cursor point with
the numeric pop-up windows, see page 27-5.
numbers from 0 to 9
In the General tab, specify what the cursor point looks like at run time,
and whether the operator can navigate to the cursor point using the
keys on the keyboard or keypad.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the cursor
point’s border to have the same color as the cursor point’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the cursor point’s border to have a
different color than the cursor point’s background, and then choose a
Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the cursor
point’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the cursor
point’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the cursor point when it is
pressed. If the cursor point does not use a border, the highlight color
is not visible when the cursor point is pressed.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the caption in the font list. Type
or click a size for the font in the size box. Click B to make the font bold,
click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the cursor point’s
edges. In the default alignment position, the text is centered vertically
and horizontally on the cursor point.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the cursor point.
The keypad is larger than the scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the
run-time computer must have an external keyboard or keypad.
To use the cursor point as a ramp button, ensure that the operator has
a way to give the cursor point focus. On the General tab, select Key
navigation.
Select Fixed Position if the values to enter in the pop-up window always
have the same number of digits after the decimal point. If you select
this type of decimal point, specify a “Digits after decimal” value.
Fill left with Select a character to fill the left of the display with if the
value at the data source contains fewer than the maximum number of
digits. If you don’t want to use a fill character, select None.
In the Timing tab, set up the timing and handshake settings for the
Enter key. These settings do not apply when you ramp values.
For information about using Enter key handshaking, see page 16-23.
Enter key hold time Click the number of milliseconds or seconds the
Enter control remains at a value of 1. This setting applies only if the
Value When the operator presses the pop-up window’s Enter key, the
numeric value the operator enters is sent to the Value control. For
example, the operator could enter a value to change the fill level for a
tank.
If the cursor point is set up as a ramp button, when the operator gives
the cursor point focus and presses a move up or move down cursor
point (or the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key on the keyboard), the
If you do not assign a tag to this control, at run time when the operator
activates the cursor point the pop-up keypad or scratchpad does not
open.
Optional Expression The Optional Expression control is an
optional write control. Assign a write expression to this control. When
the operator enters a value, the expression’s logic is performed on the
value, and the result is sent to the Value control.
If you assign this control, the cursor point does not display the value
sent to the Value control until it receives a response from the Indicator
control. Set up the data source to change the Indicator control’s value
when it has read the Value control’s value.
Enter The Enter control accepts values of 0 or 1 only. The control
determines how long the Enter key press is registered. No further
values can be entered by the cursor point when the Enter control is set
to 1.
Use this control for Enter key handshaking if you want to reset the
Enter control when a value in the programmable controller changes.
Clear the check box if you want the string display’s border to have a
different color than the string display’s background, and then choose a
Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the string
display’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the string
display’s border.
Back style Click Solid to cover objects or the display background
behind the string display. Click Transparent to allow objects or the
display background behind the string display to show through.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the string display.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text in
the string display.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the string display’s text in the
Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to
make the font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline
the text.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the string display. In
the default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the string display.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
For more information about using the string input enable button and
the string pop-up windows, see page 27-12.
2. In the String Input Enable Properties dialog box, fill in the options
on each tab, as described in the sections that follow. When you are
finished, click OK.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Key navigation Check this box to allow the operator to navigate to
the button and give it focus using the keyboard.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Browse button
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
If you don’t want to hide the text the operator types, clear the check
box.
For information about using Enter key handshaking, see page 16-23.
In the Connections tab, specify the tags or expression with which the
string input enable button exchanges data. For information about
assigning tags and expressions, see page 15-52.
Value The string value the operator enters is sent to the Value control.
Assign a tag that can support up to 82 characters (bytes).
When the operator presses the Enter key, the alphanumeric string is
sent to the data source.
If you do not assign a tag to this control, at run time when the operator
presses the button the pop-up window does not open.
Use this control for Enter key handshaking if you want to reset the
Enter control when a value in the programmable controller changes.
For more information about using goto display buttons, see page 22-5.
Specify the graphic display to open, and a parameter file to use with tag
placeholders in the display (if any).
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Display Type the name of the graphic display to open when the
button is pressed. To browse for a graphic display, click the Browse
Browse button button.
Parameter file Type the name of the parameter file to run when the
button is pressed. To browse for a parameter file, click the Browse
button.
A parameter file assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the
display opens. For more information about parameter files, see
page 14-34.
Top position Type the number of pixels from the top edge of the
application window to position the display. This option applies only if
the graphic display the button opens is an On Top display.
Left position Type the number of pixels from the left edge of the
application window to position the display. This option applies only if
the graphic display the button opens is an On Top display.
Display position Check this box if you want to use the Top position
and Left position options to position the display the button opens.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Browse button
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
For more information about using close display buttons, see page 22-7.
Specify the appearance of the button, and whether to write out a value
when the display closes.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time, and
whether to write out a value when the display closes.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Write on close Check this box to write out a value when the operator
presses the button.
Close value Type the integer value to write to the Value control.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Browse button
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
Value The value specified in the Close value box (on the General tab)
is sent to the Value control. Assign a tag that can receive the integer
value specified.
When the display closes, the integer value is sent to the data source.
For more information about using display list selectors, see page 22-8.
Specify the graphic displays associated with each state, and the
parameter files to use with tag placeholders in the display (if any).
2. In the display list selector Properties dialog box, fill in the options
on each tab, as described in the sections that follow. When you are
finished, click OK.
Clear the check box if you want the display list selector’s border to have
a different color than the selector’s background, and then choose a
Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the display
list selector’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the display
list selector’s border.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the display list selector.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Selection back color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the background of a highlighted item in the list.
Selection fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the text of a highlighted item in the list.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the display list selector’s text in
the Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to
make the font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline
the text.
Caption truncate Select Word to cut off captions that exceed the
maximum length at the beginning of a word. Select Character to cut off
captions that exceed the maximum length in the middle of a word.
The maximum caption length depends on the width of the display list
selector and the font size.
Number of states Click the number of states you want the display list
selector to have.
Display Type the name of the graphic display for the selected state. To
browse for a graphic display, click the Browse button.
Browse button
A parameter file assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the
display opens. For more information about parameter files, see
page 14-33.
Display position Check this box if you want to use the Top position
and Left position options to position the display the list opens.
Top position Type the number of pixels from the top edge of the
application window to position the display. This option applies only if
the graphic display the list opens is an On Top display.
Left position Type the number of pixels from the left edge of the
application window to position the display. This option applies only if
the graphic display the list opens is an On Top display.
Use display name Check this box to use the name of the graphic
display as the caption for the state. Clear this check box to type a
different caption for the state.
Caption Type the text you want to appear as the name of the graphic
display in the display list selector.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Caption back style Click Solid to cover the display list selector’s
background behind the text. Click Transparent to allow the display list
selector’s background to show through between the letters.
Alignment Click a position in the grid for the text, relative to the
display list selector. In the default alignment position, the text is
positioned at the left of the display list selector, inside the border (if a
border is used).
Specify the state values of the multistate indicator. At run time, the
indicator displays the state whose value matches the Indicator control’s
value.
Clear the check box if you want the indicator’s border to have a
different color than the indicator’s background, and then choose a
Border color on the States tab.
Back style Click Solid to cover objects or the display background
behind the indicator. Click Transparent to allow objects or the display
background behind the indicator to show through.
Shape Click a shape for the indicator.
Number of states Click the number of states you want the indicator
to have.
Trigger type Select Value to trigger a state based on the value of the
Value control. Select LSB to trigger a state based on the least significant
bit that is set to 1 in the Value control.
the Indicator control’s value does not match one of the state values
you set up.
the Trigger type is set to Value and the Indicator control value does
not match one of the configured state values.
the Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant
bit set in the Value control does not match one of the configured
state values
Value Type the integer value for the selected state. When the Indicator
control changes to this value, the indicator’s appearance changes to use
the settings you specify for the state.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
indicator’s border.
Blink Check this box to make the indicator blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the indicator from blinking at run time.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the indicator. If you
don’t want any text on the indicator, leave the Caption box blank.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the caption in the Font list.
Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to make the
font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Caption back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s background.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid for the text, relative to the
indicator. In the default alignment position, the text is centered
vertically and horizontally on the indicator.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the indicator, or
Browse button
click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Setting up symbols
The symbol is an indicator that displays a single monochrome image
that changes color to match the state of a process or operation. This
allows the operator to see the status of a process or operation at a
glance.
Specify the state values, and the color of the image for each state. At
run time, the symbol displays the state that matches the Indicator
control’s value.
2. In the Symbol Properties dialog box, fill in the options on each tab,
as described in the sections that follow. When you are finished,
click OK.
Number of states Click the number of states you want the symbol to
have.
Image Type the name of the monochrome image file to display on the
symbol, or click the Browse button to browse for the image.
Browse button
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Trigger type Select Value to trigger a state based on the value of the
Value control. Select LSB to trigger a state based on the least significant
bit that is set to 1 in the Value control.
the Indicator control’s value does not match one of the state values
you set up.
the Trigger type is set to Value and the Indicator control value does
not match one of the configured state values.
the Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant
bit set in the Value control does not match one of the configured
state values.
Value Type the integer value for the selected state. When the Indicator
control changes to this value, the symbol’s appearance changes to the
settings you specify for the state.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
monochrome image.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of the monochrome image.
Image back style Click Solid to cover the symbol’s background
behind the image. Click Transparent to allow the symbol’s background
to show through spaces in the image.
Image blink Check this box to make the monochrome image blink at
run time. Clear the check box to prevent the image from blinking at run
time.
For sequential processes, the list can inform the operator about what
happens next.
Specify the state values of the list indicator. At run time, the indicator
highlights the state whose value matches the Indicator control’s value.
The list indicator has no error state. If the value of the Indicator control
does not match any of the available states, none of the states is
highlighted.
Clear the check box if you want the indicator’s border to have a
different color than the indicator’s background, and then choose a
Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
indicator’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
indicator’s border.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the indicator.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Selection fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the text of a highlighted item in the list.
Selection back color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the background of a highlighted item in the list.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the indicator’s text in the Font
list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to make the
font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Caption truncate Select Word to cut off captions that exceed the
maximum length at the beginning of the word. Select Character to cut
off captions that exceed the maximum length in the middle of a word.
Number of states Click the number of states you want the indicator
to have.
Trigger type Select Value to trigger a state based on the value of the
Value control. Select LSB to trigger a state based on the least significant
bit that is set to 1 in the Value control.
Caption Type the text to display on the indicator for this state.
Caption color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s text.
Caption back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s background.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Caption back style Click Solid to use the Caption back color behind
the text. Click Transparent to allow the indicator’s background to show
through between the letters.
Alignment Click a position in the grid for the text, relative to the
indicator. In the default alignment position, the text is positioned at the
left of the indicator, inside the border (if a border is used).
For example, one bar graph can show the required level of a tank, and
a second bar graph can show the actual level of the tank. The first graph
can change to represent the required level for a particular application,
and the second graph changes as the actual level in the tank rises or
drops.
If the recipe will empty the tank, the graph can show the level in
yellow.
If the level is higher than the level the recipe requires, the graph can
show the level in green.
If you want to use a different fill color on a bar graph to show abnormal
conditions, make sure enough of the new fill color is visible when the
abnormal condition occurs that the operator can see the condition.
Scales consist of major ticks, represented by long lines, and minor ticks,
represented by short lines. To indicate the values of major or minor
ticks, use text objects.
Gauges are used instead of numeric displays when it’s important for the
operator to recognize an abnormal condition instantly, either from far
away when the scale on the gauge isn’t visible, or before the operator
has had the opportunity to determine the exact reading on the gauge.
This characteristic of gauges is one of the reasons why they are used in
automobile instrumentation.
If the temperature is in the correct range for the recipe, the gauge
can show the temperature in green
If the temperature is higher than the recipe allows, the gauge can
show the temperature in red
Specify the minimum and maximum values of the bar graph, and the
tag or expression to which the graph is connected. At run time, the
graph shows the value of the tag or expression in relation to the graph’s
minimum and maximum values.
2. In the Bar Graph Properties dialog box, fill in the options on each
tab, as described in the sections that follow. When you are finished,
click OK.
In the General tab, specify what the bar graph looks like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the bar graph’s
border to have the same color as the bar graph’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the bar graph’s border to have a
different color than the bar graph’s background.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the bar
graph’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the bar
graph’s border.
Fill color Click the color box, and then click a color for the filled part
of the graph. The filled part represents a numeric value, and is displayed
against the graph’s background. If you use thresholds, this color is used
until the graph’s value reaches the first threshold.
Value The Value control changes the fill level on the bar graph. For
example, the Value control can show the temperature in an oven going
up.
Setting up gauges
The gauge graphic object represents numeric values using a needle on
a dial.
Number formats
The numeric display uses the number formats you set up on the run-
time computer.
Specify the minimum and maximum values of the gauge, and the tag or
expression to which the gauge is connected. At run time, the gauge
indicates the value of the tag or expression in relation to the gauge’s
minimum and maximum values.
2. In the Gauge Properties dialog box, fill in the options on each tab,
as described in the sections that follow. When you are finished,
click OK.
Show legend Check this box to show numeric labels on the gauge.
The labels show the numeric value for each major tick on the gauge.
Clear this check box to remove labels from the gauge.
Digits after decimal Click the number of digits to display after the
decimal point for the numeric labels on the gauge’s scale.
Legend color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
numeric labels on the gauge’s scale.
Threshold fill and blink indicators do not appear if the Sweep style is
Point. The Sweep style is specified in the General tab.
Fill color Click the color box, and then click a color for the filled part
of the gauge above the threshold.
Blink Check this box to make the filled section above the threshold
blink at run time. Clear the check box to prevent the filled section from
blinking at run time.
Value The Value control changes the position of the needle on the
gauge. For example, the Value control can indicate that a machine is
overheating, or that a tank is empty.
Specify how the scale looks. Because the scale doesn’t change at run
time, you don’t need to assign tags or expressions to it.
To place value labels on the scale (to create a legend), use text objects.
Create the text objects and then position them next to the tick marks
on the scale.
Clear the check box if you want the scale’s border to have a different
color than the scale’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the scale’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the scale’s
border.
Line style Click a line style for the scale. If you want a line style other
than solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.
Line width Type a number to change the line thickness of the scale.
Line width is measured in pixels.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the lines of
the scale.
Blink Check this box to make the scale blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the scale from blinking at run time.
Tick direction Click the direction for the ticks to face. For example,
if you are positioning the scale to the right of a vertical bar graph, click
right.
A control list selector can show several states at the same time, but only
one state can be selected at a time. As the operator scrolls through the
list, each successive state is selected automatically. If you want the
The operator can scroll through the control list selector using:
button graphic objects. These are graphic objects that duplicate the
functions of keyboard keys. For information about the different
button graphic objects, see page 16-36.
You can use Enter key handshaking to hold the value of the tag at the
programmable controller or device for a specific period of time, to
ensure the value is read before the control list selector overwrites the
value with a new value.
Clear the check box if you want the control list selector’s border to have
a different color than the selector’s background, and then choose a
Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the control
list selector’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
control list selector’s border.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the selector.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Selection back color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the background of a highlighted item in the list.
Selection fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the text of a highlighted item in the list.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the selector’s text in the Font
list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to make the
font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Caption truncate Select Word to cut off captions that exceed the
maximum length at the beginning of a word. Select Character to cut off
captions that exceed the maximum length in the middle of a word.
The maximum caption length depends on the width of the selector and
the font size.
Number of states Click the number of states you want the selector to
have.
Write on enter Check this box to send the control list selector’s state
value to the programmable controller when the operator presses Enter.
Caption Type the text to display in the list for this state.
Caption color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s text.
Caption back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s background.
The caption’s background color is visible only on items in the list that
are not highlighted, and if the Caption back style is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Caption back style Click Solid to cover the control list selector’s
background color with the caption’s background color. Click
Transparent to hide the caption’s background color.
For information about using Enter key handshaking, see page 16-23.
Value The Value control triggers the state’s action. For example, when
the tag assigned to the control changes to a new state, the data source
changes a motor’s speed to a new setting.
Enter The Enter control accepts values of 0 or 1 only. The control
determines how long the Enter key press is registered. No further
values can be entered by the selector when the Enter control is set to 1.
Enter handshake The Enter handshake control resets the Enter
control, using the “Handshake reset type” option specified on the
Timing tab.
Use this control for Enter key handshaking if you want to reset the
Enter control when a value in the programmable controller changes.
The state values of all of the items that are visible in the list can be
written to the Visible States tag when the list scrolls. The Visible
States tag must be a data-server tag that supports arrays. You cannot
use an HMI tag.
The state value of the item at the top of the list can be written to the
Top Position tag when the list scrolls.
The value of the Remote Access tag determines who can select the
piloted control list selector’s states. When the piloted control list
selector is set up to be:
The operator can select this state. The operator cannot select
this state.
key objects. These are graphic objects that duplicate the functions
of keyboard keys. Use them with touch-screen terminals. For
details, see “Assigning function keys to buttons” on page 16-12.
The operator presses the keys to scroll up or down the list, or to make
selections from the list. The keys can be set up to work with the piloted
control list selector that has focus, or with a specific piloted control list
selector.
If the piloted control list selector contains more states than can be
displayed in the list simultaneously, the value of the Top Position tag (if
assigned) changes whenever the item at the top of the list changes.
Clear the check box if you want the piloted control list selector’s border
to have a different color than the selector’s background, and then
choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the piloted
control list selector’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
piloted control list selector’s border.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the selector.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Selection back color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the background of a highlighted item in the list.
Selection fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the text of a highlighted item in the list.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the selector’s text in the Font
list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to make the
font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Caption truncate Select Word to cut off captions that exceed the
maximum length at the beginning of a word. Select Character to cut off
captions that exceed the maximum length in the middle of a word.
The maximum caption length depends on the width of the selector and
the font size.
Number of states Click the number of states you want the selector to
have. You can set up 255 states for a piloted control list selector. This
provides the operator with up to 255 selections in the list.
Write on enter Check this box to send the piloted control list
selector’s state value to the programmable controller when the operator
presses Enter.
You can also set up whether each state can be selected by the operator,
or remotely, for example by a programmable controller or other device,
or by both the operator and a remote device, or by neither. If you set
access to None, the state cannot be selected.
Caption Type the text to display in the list for this state.
Caption color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s text.
Caption back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
caption’s background.
The caption’s background color is visible only on items in the list that
are not highlighted, and if the Caption back style is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Caption back style Click Solid to cover the piloted control list
selector’s background color with the caption’s background color. Click
Transparent to hide the caption’s background color.
In the Connections tab, specify the tags or expression with which the
piloted control list selector exchanges data. For information about
assigning tags and expressions, see page 15-52.
Value The application reads the Value control to determine what state
to select when a display that includes a piloted control lists selector is
opened, and the operator has control of the list. The application does
not read the Value connection at any other time. When the operator
selects a valid state, if its Value connection is assigned, the state’s value
is written to the Value connection.
Indicator The indicator control selects a state in the list when the
piloted control selector is controlled remotely.
Top Position The Top Position control writes the value of the top
visible state in the list to this tag.
Visible States Assign a direct reference array tag to this control. You
cannot use an HMI tag. When the list scrolls, the values of the visible
states are read to the array tag. The first visible state is written to the
first element of the array tag, the second visible state is written to the
second element of the array tag, and so on.
The length of the array tag must be the same as the number of visible
states the object has. The syntax of the array tag is dependent on the
type of OPC data server the application is using.
For more information about local messages, see page 14-40. For
information about creating local message files, see page 14-45.
In the General tab, specify what the local message display looks like at
run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the local
message display’s border to have the same color as the local message
display’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the local message display’s border to
have a different color than the local message display’s background, and
then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the local
message display’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the local
message display’s border.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the local message display.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text of
the message in the local message display.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the local message display’s text
in the Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B
to make the font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to
underline the text.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the local message
display. In the default alignment position, the text is centered vertically
and horizontally on the local message display.
Message file Type the name of the local message file to use for this
Browse button local message display. Click the Browse button to browse for the file
instead of typing its name.
If no message exists for the trigger value, the display is filled with
question marks (?).
Specify the appearance of the button and the macro to run when the
operator presses the button.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time, and
the macro to run when the button is pressed.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Macro Type the name of the macro to run when the button is pressed.
To browse for a macro, click the Browse button.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
In the Label tab, specify what text or image to display on the button.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
Browse button click the Browse button to browse for the image.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
Specify the appearance of the time and date display, and the format in
which the time and date appear.
2. In the Time Date Display Properties dialog box, fill in the options
on the General tab, as described in the next section. When you are
finished, click OK.
In the General tab, specify what the time and date display looks like at
run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border width Type a number to change the thickness of the time and
date display’s border. Border width is measured in pixels.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the time and
date display’s border to have the same color as the display’s
background.
Clear the check box if you want the time and date display’s border to
have a different color than the display’s background, and then choose
a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the time and
date display’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the time
and date display’s border.
Pattern style Click a pattern style for the time and date display.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text of
the time and date display.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the time and date display’s text
in the Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B
to make the font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to
underline the text.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the time and date
display. In the default alignment position, the text is centered vertically
and horizontally on the display.
Time and date format Click the format in which to display the time
and date. The options include date only and time only.
The operator can press the print alarm history button to print a report
of all the alarm messages in the alarm log file. The report can include
the time alarms occurred and were acknowledged.
Specify the appearance of the print alarm history button, and the types
of information to include on the report.
2. In the Print Alarm History Button Properties dialog box, fill in the
options on each tab, as described in the sections that follow. When
you are finished, click OK.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
In the Label tab, specify what text or image to display on the button.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
Browse button click the Browse button to browse for the image.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
3. In the Width box, type the number of characters for the width of
the column.
This box applies to the width of the column for the trigger label and
trigger value only.
5. In the Title box, type the title for the report, up to 80 characters.
The title is printed at the top of the report.
Specify the appearance of the print alarm status button, and the types
of information to include on the report.
2. In the Print Alarm Status Button Properties dialog box, fill in the
options on each tab, as described in the sections that follow. When
you are finished, click OK.
In the General tab, specify what the button looks like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the button’s
border to have the same color as the button’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the button’s border to have a different
color than the button’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the button’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
button’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Highlight color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
selection border that appears around the button when it is pressed. If
the button does not use a border, the highlight color is not visible when
the button is pressed.
Blink Check this box to make the button blink at run time. Clear the
check box to prevent the button from blinking at run time.
Audio Check this box to beep the computer’s internal speaker when
the operator presses the button.
If the computer running the display does not have an internal speaker,
pressing the button does not trigger a beep.
In the Label tab, specify what text or image to display on the button.
Caption Type the text you want to appear on the button. If you don’t
want any text on the button, leave the Caption box blank.
The caption’s background color is visible only if the Caption back style
is Solid.
Caption blink Check this box to make the caption blink at run time.
Clear the check box to prevent the caption from blinking at run time.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the button. In the
default alignment position, the text is centered vertically and
horizontally on the button.
Image Type the name of the image file to display on the button, or
Browse button click the Browse button to browse for the image.
If you click the Browse button, the Image Browser opens. Click an
image in the Select image box, and then click OK.
Image color Click the color box, and then click a color for a
monochrome image. You cannot change the color of grayscale or color
images.
Image back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
background of a monochrome image. You cannot change the
background color of grayscale or color images.
Image scaled Check this box to scale the image to fit the area of the
button. Clear this check box to crop the image to the area of the button
if it is too large to fit on the button.
3. In the Width box, type the number of characters for the width of
the column.
This box applies to the width of the column for the trigger label and
trigger value only.
All alarms—prints all the alarms for each alarm trigger that has
been set up, whether or not an alarm has ever been active.
Active alarms—prints all the alarms that are active at the time
the button is pressed.
Past alarms—prints all the alarms that have been active since
the alarm status was last reset.
The alarm list graphic object displays a list of alarms from the alarm log
file. It can show all the alarms in the alarm log file, or only alarms that
have not been acknowledged yet. It can also show the alarms for
specific alarm triggers.
For more information about using alarm lists, see page 9-48. For
information about the alarm log file, see page 9-9.
Specify the appearance of the alarm list, whether it displays all alarms
or only unacknowledged alarms, and whether to show the alarms for
specific alarm triggers.
2. In the Alarm List Properties dialog box, fill in the options on each
tab, as described in the sections that follow. When you are finished,
click OK.
In the General tab, specify what the alarm list looks like at run time,
whether the operator can navigate to the list using a keyboard, and how
scrolling works for the list.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the alarm list’s
border to have the same color as the list’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the alarm list’s border to have a
different color than the list’s background, and then choose a Border
color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the alarm
list’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the alarm
list’s border.
Header back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
heading bar at the top of the list.
Header fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
text in the heading bar at the top of the list.
Selection back color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the background of a highlighted item in the list.
Selection fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the text of a highlighted item in the list.
3. For the alarm time and acknowledge time, click the format in
which to display the time and date.
4. In the Header text box, type the heading to appear at the top of the
column, up to 80 characters.
7. Specify whether to display the column headings for the alarm list.
Check the Display Header box to display the headings.
8. If you want to show only the alarms for specific alarm triggers,
type the trigger labels in the Filtered triggers box. Or, click the
Browse button
Browse button to browse for the trigger names.
For more information about using alarm banners, see page 9-50.
Clear the check box if you want the banner’s border to have a different
color than the banner’s background, and then choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the banner’s
background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
banner’s border.
Back style Click Solid to cover objects or the display background
behind the banner. Click Transparent to allow objects or the display
background behind the banner to show through.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the banner’s text in the Font list.
Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to make the
font bold, click I to make the font italic, click U to underline the text.
Clear the check box if you want the banner to always display the most
recent alarm.
Display trigger value Check this box to display the trigger value
associated with the alarm.
Display trigger label Check this box to display the trigger label
associated with the alarm.
Display inactive alarms Check this box to display inactive alarms. If
an alarm is inactive, that means it is no longer in alarm and the
condition that triggered the alarm no longer exists.
Display alarm state If you select Display active and inactive alarms,
check this box to display the alarm state. If an alarm is still active, an
asterisk (*) appears beside the message.
Display alarm time Check this box to display the alarm time.
Alarm time format If you select Display alarm time, click the format
in which to display the time and date for the alarm time.
The operator can view the status list in three different modes:
All alarms—displays the status of all alarms that have been defined
in the Alarm Setup editor.
Past alarms—displays the status of all the alarms that have been
active since the alarm status has been reset.
The operator can press the alarm status mode button to cycle through
the different modes.
If desired, you can set up the alarm status list to show alarms for
specific alarm triggers only.
For more information about using alarm status lists, see page 9-51.
Specify the appearance of the alarm status list, and the type of
information to display.
2. In the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box, fill in the options
on each tab, as described in the sections that follow. When you are
finished, click OK.
In the General tab, specify what the alarm status list looks like at run
time, whether the operator can navigate to the list using a keyboard,
and how scrolling works for the list.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the alarm status
list’s border to have the same color as the list’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the alarm status list’s border to have a
different color than the list’s background, and then choose a Border
color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the alarm
status list’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the alarm
status list’s border.
Header back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
heading bar at the top of the list.
Header fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
text in the heading bar at the top of the list.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the alarm status list’s text in the
Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to
2. Check the Display box to include the information in the list. Clear
the box if you don’t want the information to appear in the list.
3. In the Width box, type the number of pixels for the width of the
column.
4. In the Header text box, type the heading to appear at the top of the
column, up to 80 characters.
All alarms—displays the status of all the alarms that have been
defined in the Alarm Setup editor.
Active alarms—displays the status of all the alarms that are
currently active.
Past alarms—displays the status of all the alarms that have been
active since the alarm status was last reset.
7. In the Titles box, type a title for the alarm status list, up to 80
characters. Type a title for each status mode. At run time, the title
for the current status mode appears at the top of the list.
8. Specify whether to display the column headings and title for the
alarm status list. Check the boxes to display the headings and title.
9. If you want to show only the alarm status for specific alarm
triggers, type the trigger labels in the Filtered triggers box. Or, click
Browse button
the Browse button to browse for the trigger names.
For more information about using diagnostics lists, see page 10-25.
Specify the appearance of the diagnostics list, and whether the operator
can navigate to the list using a keyboard.
In the General tab, specify what the diagnostics list looks like at run
time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the diagnostics
list’s border to have the same color as the list’s background.
Clear the check box if you want the diagnostics list’s border to have a
different color than the list’s background, and then choose a Border
color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
diagnostics list’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
diagnostics list’s border.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text in
the diagnostics list.
Selection back color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the background of a highlighted item in the list.
Selection fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for
the text of a highlighted item in the list.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the diagnostics list’s text in the
Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size box. Click B to
In the General tab, specify what the information message display looks
like at run time.
Border style Click a border style in the list, or click None to remove
the border.
Border uses back color Check this box if you want the information
message display’s border to have the same color as the display’s
background.
Clear the check box if you want the information message display’s
border to have a different color than the display’s background, and then
choose a Border color.
Back color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
information message display’s background.
Border color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
information message display’s border.
Pattern color Click the color box, and then click a color for the
pattern.
Fore color Click the color box, and then click a color for the text of
the information message display.
Font, size, and style Click a font for the information message
display’s text in the Font list. Type or click a size for the font in the Size
box. Click B to make the font bold, click I to make the font italic, click
U to underline the text.
Word wrap Check this box if you want the caption to continue on the
next line at the beginning of a new word. If this box is not checked, the
caption continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length
is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. The maximum
text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.
Alignment Click a position in the grid, relative to the information
message display. In the default alignment position, the text is centered
vertically and horizontally on the display.
17 Animating graphic
objects
This chapter describes:
testing animation.
setting the minimum and maximum values for animation that uses
a range of motion.
Types of animation
color
fill
height
horizontal position
horizontal slider
rotation
vertical position
vertical slider
visibility
width
You can also attach animation to groups of drawing objects. For more
information, see page 17-37.
Animation tabs Click the tab for the type of animation to set up. If the
animation type is not supported for the selected object, the boxes in the
tab are unavailable.
To supply a tag name for an expression, click the Tags button and then
select a name, or type the name in the Expression box. If you use
multiple tags in an expression, the first tag's minimum and maximum
values are used if you select the expression range “Use tag’s min and
max property values.”
Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces
{ } when you use them in an expression. This distinguishes the
characters in the tag name from the characters in the expression.
For horizontal and vertical sliders, you assign a single tag to define
animation. In the Animation tabs for slider animation, there is a Tags
box rather than an Expression box.
Tag names
You can use tag names that you have already added to the HMI tag
database or you can use a new tag name.
Tag placeholders
Tag placeholders allow you to create displays that can be used with
different tags.
the graphic display that opens when the application is first run.
The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name, including folder
names. For example, you could create a parameter file specifying that
the tag placeholder #1=Folder1. You could assign the folder and a tag
name to a graphic object's control: #1\Tag1.
Using expressions
Many types of animation can be achieved using expressions. You can
use expressions containing tag values, constants, mathematical
equations, and if-then-else logic. A tag name or tag placeholder can be
included as part of an expression, or it can stand alone as the entire
expression.
For analog HMI tags, the values are taken from the Minimum and
Maximum boxes in the Tags editor. For digital tags, the minimum is
0 and the maximum is 1.
If you use this method, the tags are read when the graphic display
opens. Their values at that time are used for the minimum and
maximum values. The tags are not read again after this.
Use the mouse to move the object in the display. This uses the
Object Smart Path feature to visually define the range of motion.
2. Open the Animation dialog box and click the Horizontal Slider tab.
5. In the display, drag the rectangle to the position that will indicate
the lowest number in the range.
When you finish setting up the animation, the rectangle returns to its
original position.
2. Open the Animation dialog box and click the Visibility tab.
CurrentUserName( ) == “ADMIN”
At run time, the object is visible only if the Admin user is logged in.
5. In the Value box, type the threshold value. When the expression
value reaches this threshold, the object’s color changes.
To select a color, click the color box, and then click the desired
color.
Specify the solid color here. Specify the blinking colors here.
8. In the Blink rate box, specify how many seconds each blink cycle
will be. For example, if you specify four seconds, the object will be
one color for two seconds and the other color for two seconds.
9. Click Apply.
2. Open the Animation dialog box, and then click the Color tab.
4. In the list box, click threshold A. (Leave the value in the Value box
as 0.)
5. For the foreground color, click Blink. (If desired, click Blink for
the background color too.)
6. For each color, click the color box, and then click the color to use.
7. Click Apply.
3. With the rectangle selected, open the Animation dialog box, and
then click the Fill tab.
5. Click the Color tab and then attach color animation as follows:
In the list box, click A. (In the Value box, leave the value as 0.)
For each, click the color box, and then click gray (the same gray
used for the rectangle).
Yellow
Gray
For the foreground colors, select gray for the first color and
yellow for the second color. Repeat for the background colors.
Red
Gray
For the foreground colors, select gray for the first color and red
for the second color. Repeat for the background colors.
6. Click Apply.
With fill animation, the level of fill in an object is based on a tag value
(or the result of an expression) in relation to the specified minimum
and maximum values. For example, if the value of the expression is
halfway between the minimum and maximum values, the object will be
half full.
If you select the Inside Only check box, fill animation does not affect
line objects or objects with transparent backgrounds.
8. Click Apply.
4. Set the starting point for the object by dragging the object or by
typing a value in pixels (in relation to its current position on the
display).
9. Click Apply.
4. Set the starting point for the object by dragging the object or by
typing a value in pixels (in relation to its current position on the
display).
6. Set the ending point for the object by dragging the object or by
typing a value in pixels (in relation to its current position on the
display).
9. Click Apply.
4. Set the minimum width for the object by doing one of the
following:
Click a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it
to resize the object.
Type the width (as a percentage of the full width) you want the
object to be when the expression evaluates to its minimum
value.
Click a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it
to resize the object.
Type the width (as a percentage of the full width) you want the
object to be when the expression evaluates to its maximum
value.
7. Click the At maximum check box.
This is the part of the object that does not move. For example, click
Left if you do not want the left side of the object to move. As the
value of the expression changes, the object will grow to or shrink
from the right.
4. Set the minimum height for the object by doing one of the
following:
This is the part of the object that does not move. For example, click
Top if you do not want the top of the object to move. As the value
of the expression changes, the object will grow to or shrink from
the bottom.
4. Set the center of rotation using one of the methods described next.
The center of rotation is the point around which the object will
rotate. This point can be inside or outside of the object. If it is
outside, the object will appear as if it is moving in an arc.
Why use the default center points? If you set the center of rotation
with the default center points, the object will rotate around the same
point even if the object is resized. For example, the top-middle
point will always be the center of rotation no matter what size the
object is.
Specifying coordinates
The default coordinates 0,0 are the center of the object; all
coordinate values are relative to the center. To specify coordinates,
do one of the following:
Select the button beside the coordinates box. Place the mouse
pointer over the object’s cross-hair until the cursor changes to a
cross-hair, and then click and drag the cross-hair to the desired
center of rotation.
Type values in the coordinates box, and then select the button
beside the box.
To set the minimum, do one of the following and then select the At
minimum check box:
With the cursor indicating the Rotate tool (not the cross-hair),
visually set the degree of rotation by clicking the mouse and
With the cursor indicating the Rotate tool (not the cross-hair),
visually set the degree of rotation by clicking the mouse and
dragging until the object is in the desired maximum (ending)
position.
Type the desired maximum degree of rotation (this value is
relative to the object’s current position). For clockwise rotation,
use a positive number. For counterclockwise rotation, use a
negative number.
6. Select the method to use to calculate the expression’s minimum
and maximum values.
7. Click Apply.
Tips
The Sliders graphic library contains several slider objects you can
drag and drop into your graphic displays. Attach slider animation to
the button portion of the slider object.
If you create your own slider object, it’s useful to draw an object (for
example, a line) to represent the path the slider will move along.
3. In the Tag box, type the name of the tag whose value will be set by
the slider.
6. Set the ending point for the slider object by dragging the object or
by typing a value (in relation to its current position on the display).
9. Click Apply.
3. In the Tag box, type the name of the tag whose value will be set by
the slider.
4. Set the starting point for the slider object by dragging the object or
by typing a value (in relation to its current position on the display).
6. Set the ending point for the slider object by dragging the object or
by typing a value (in relation to its current position on the display).
9. Click Apply.
To apply animation to objects within groups, use the group edit feature.
For details, see page 15-70.
To see what type of animation has been set up for objects within a
group, use the group edit feature or the Object Explorer. For
information about using the group edit feature, see page 15-70.
1. Select an object.
Click the Animation menu and see which items have a check
mark.
Right-click the object and then select Animation to see which
items have a check mark.
1. Select an object.
When the Animation dialog box opens, look at which tabs have
check marks on them to see which types of animation have been set
up.
4. Click Apply.
1. Select the object that has the animation you want to copy.
To paste to a single object, you can right-click the object and then
click Paste Animation.
18 Setting up trends
This chapter describes:
About trends
A trend is a visual representation of current or historical tag values. The
trend provides operators with a way of tracking plant activity as it is
happening.
You can:
create buttons to allow the operator to pause, scroll, and print the
trend data.
The illustration below shows a trend that has been added to a graphic
display. You can view the Kiln Status display by opening the Malthouse
sample application.
The trend
graphic object
For historical values, data comes from a data log model’s log file, if a
model is assigned to the trend. You can display both current and
historical data in the same trend.
Setting up trends ■
18–3
uses digital plotting. For more information about plot types, see
page 18-7.
Trend border
The border appears around the trend object at run time when the trend
is selected. The border uses the highlight color for the graphic display,
specified in the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box.
Trend window
The area around the chart, between the border and the chart, is the
trend window. You can use the Property Panel to specify whether the
Chart
The chart is the area of the trend in which values are plotted. It is
bounded by the y-axis on the left and the x-axis on the bottom. It
contains the plotted trend data (shown using pen lines and pen
markers), as well as grid lines (if you choose to display them).
Y-axis
The y-axis is the left vertical edge of the chart. It is also known as the
vertical axis.
The vertical axis labels show the scale (range) of values for the pens. If
desired, you can set up the trend to omit the vertical axis labels.
The minimum and maximum values for the scale can be determined
automatically (using the best fit for the current data), be derived from
a pen’s minimum and maximum values, use a constant value, or be
controlled by tags.
You can set up the trend so all pens use the same scale, or use individual
ranges for each pen. If you choose the latter method, create a next pen
button in the graphic display, to allow operators to view the range for
each pen. When the operator presses the button, the vertical axis
changes to the new pen’s range.
Setting up trends ■
18–5
X-axis
The x-axis is the bottom horizontal edge of the chart. It is also known
as the horizontal axis.
If desired, you can set up the trend to omit the horizontal axis labels.
The number of labels depends on the size of the trend object and the
number of vertical grid lines.
Pens
Pens are the lines and/or symbols used to represent values. The values
can be tags you are monitoring, expressions that manipulate tag values,
or constants. For details, see page 18-14.
If there is no data for a pen, or if the data is outside the vertical axis
range, the pen does not appear in the chart.
Pen icons
Pen icons appear at the right edge of the chart at run time, if you choose
to display them. The icon’s position indicates the pen’s most recent
recorded value (from the value table), even if the trend is paused or if
the most recent value has not been plotted yet.
Pen markers
Pen markers are symbols that indicate data points. If data is plotted
frequently, the markers might not appear as distinct, separate symbols.
For example, see the lowest pen in the illustration on page 18-3.
Notice that the horizontal axis labels display the range for the specified
x-axis pen. The time period covered by the chart is at the upper left.
Setting up trends ■
18–7
Isolated graphing
For charts with multiple pens, you can allow the pen values to overlap,
or you can isolate each pen in its own horizontal band on the chart.
Notice that in this illustration each pen uses its own scale. If desired,
you can use the same scale for all pens.
There are two ways to plot a value across the full width of the chart:
When values for the pen have been plotted across the full width of
the chart, the pen appears as a solid line.
You can also specify these settings in the Properties tab of the Property
Panel.
Setting up trends ■
18–9
To specify this Use this box or column In this tab
The trend border uses the highlight color for the graphic display,
specified in the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box.
By default, the trend window uses the background color of the display,
specified in the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box.
For information about using the Property Panel, see page 15-42.
On the View menu, click Test Display or Edit Display, or click the
Test Display mode Test Display and Edit Display tools.
Summary of steps
These are the steps for creating a trend:
1. To plot historical data, create a data log model in the Data Log
Model editor. For information, see Chapter 11.
For information about the buttons you can use with trends, see
page 18-30.
5. To keep a printed record of the trend data, provide a way for the
operator to print the graphic display. For information see
page 18-32.
Setting up trends ■
18–11
Creating trend objects
7. To name the trend, open the Property Panel and then type a name
in the (Name) row.
The name is used in the status bar, activity bar, Property Panel,
Object Explorer, and activity log messages.
Once you have set up the trend, you can edit it as you would any other
graphic object. You can move it, resize it, attach animation to it, and so
on. You can also use this object in other graphic displays by dragging it
from one display and dropping it into another.
Setting up trends ■
18–13
Before you set up the pens in the Pens tab, use the Connections tab to
specify the tags and expressions for which to plot data.
Chart style
24-hour format
AM/PM format
Setting up trends ■
18–15
Chart radix Specify the number base to use for displaying numeric
values in the trend labels. If you select the XY Plot chart style, this
setting affects the labels on the y-axis and the x-axis.
Data point connection Specify how data points on the trend are
connected:
Display pen icons Select this box to display an icon for each pen
at the right side of the trend chart. The pen icon moves vertically to
indicate the current value of the pen, even if the chart is not
scrolling, so some pen icons might not be at the end of a line.
The labels on the vertical axis use the color of the first pen, unless
you select the “Each pen on independent scale” option (in the Y-
Axis tab), in which case the label’s color matches the pen whose
range is currently displayed on the vertical axis.
Setting up trends ■
18–17
view these data records by manually scrolling (using the key
buttons).
The maximum buffer size is 32,767 data points. Divide this number
by the number of pens in the trend to determine the maximum data
records per pen.
The more data points held in the buffer, the faster it is to scroll.
However, a larger buffer size also requires more system resources.
Start date and Start time These settings are not available if you
select “Allow scrolling,” on the Display tab. If you want to specify a
starting date and time for the trend, clear the Allow scrolling check
box.
To select a date from the calendar, click the Down Arrow beside the
Start date box.
If the trend is plotting historical data, and the data log model is
running at the specified start time, data is displayed from this time
onwards. Otherwise, the earliest available data (after the start time)
is displayed. Once the operator scrolls to the current time, values
are taken from the value table, not the data log file.
Time span In this box type a time, and then click a time unit, to
specify the amount of data the trend displays at run time.
For a standard chart, the time span controls the horizontal scale.
For an XY Plot chart, the Min and Max values (specified in the Pens
tab) of the selected pen control the horizontal scale, and the time
span controls the number of data points plotted.
Setting up trends ■
18–19
Display scale Check this box to display x-axis labels at the bottom
of the trend.
For a standard chart, the labels show the start and end times. If
there’s room, intermediate times are shown below each vertical grid
line.
For an XY Plot chart, the labels show the minimum and maximum
value range of the pen selected as the x-axis. If there’s room,
intermediate values are shown as well.
Display grid lines Check this box to display vertical grid lines on
the chart, and then type the number of major and minor lines to
display.
Setting up trends ■
18–21
the trend acquires new data, the y-axis might rescale to fit the
new values.
Preset—the minimum and maximum pen values, set up in the
Pens tab, serve as the y-axis scale. The scale does not change.
Which pen’s minimum and maximum values are used depends
on the scale options you select in this tab.
Custom—allows you to specify constant minimum and
maximum values, or to assign tags or expressions whose values
are used to determine the minimum and maximum values.
To use constant minimum and maximum values, click Actual
minimum value and type the value in the box. Repeat for the
maximum value.
Grid color If you display grid lines, click this box to select the color
for the lines.
If you use isolated graphing, this color is used for the horizontal
lines between bands.
Scale using pen—uses the same scale for all pens, based on the
minimum and maximum values for the specified pen, or based
on the best fit for the pen’s actual data. Select the pen to use.
Setting up trends ■
18–23
Scale as percentage Check this box to display the y-axis values
as a percentage of the minimum and maximum range. The y-axis
labels display the percentage range, from 0 to 100%.
To plot historical values, specify tags from the data log model you’ll
be using at run time. (Specify the data log model in the Pens tab.)
If desired, you can specify both tags that are in a data log model and
tags that are not. You cannot use expressions to plot historical
values.
Setting up trends ■
18–25
Setting up pens
Before you set up pens, assign tags or expressions to the pens in the
Connections tab.
To set up pens
At run time, the selected pen’s color is also used for the labels on
the vertical axis.
Setting up trends ■
18–27
Min and Max If you specify the “Preset minimum/maximum
value” option (in the Y-Axis tab), type the minimum and maximum
values for the pens.
Link Data Check this box to use the assigned tag’s minimum and
maximum values. Checking this box disables the Min and Max
columns. If the tag’s minimum and maximum values are not
available, ??? appears in the columns.
For digital tags, the minimum is 0 and the maximum is 1. For analog
HMI tags, specify the minimum and maximum values in the Tags
editor.
Data Log Model For historical data, select the data log model to
use to supply the data when the trend is first displayed or you scroll
back in time (using the key buttons). If buffered data is available,
that data is used instead of the data from the model.
If the trend plots current values only, accept the default of None.
Make sure you add the tags to the data log model.
For information about the buttons you can use with trends, see
page 18-30.
To have a printed record of the trend data, provide a way for the
operator to print the graphic display. For information see
page 18-32.
You can use the trend and objects as they are, or you can edit them to
suit your needs. To use the objects, drag and drop (or copy and paste)
them into your graphic display.
Setting up trends ■
18–29
For information about copying and pasting objects from the graphic
libraries, see page 15-63.
1. Open the Graphics folder, and then open the Libraries folder.
3. Drag and drop or copy and paste objects into your display.
You can place buttons in the same graphic display as the trend, to allow
the operator to pause the trend, switch between pens, or scroll the
trend.
Setting up trends ■
18–31
This button Does this
Home Pauses the trend and moves to the earliest data in the
trend.
End Resumes trend scrolling and moves to the current
(latest) data in the trend.
To see how the buttons work with the trend, open the Trends graphic
library (see page 18-29), and start test mode (see page 18-10).
For information about creating buttons, see Chapter 15. For details
about setting up the buttons, see page 16-36.
You can use these methods to print graphic displays at run time:
Program the data source to trigger the change as often as you want
the data printed.
For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for
Windows 2000 or Windows XP applications, see page 24-11. For
information about specifying printer options for applications that will
Setting up trends ■
18–33
Chapter
19 Creating expressions
This chapter describes:
using constants.
About expressions
Sometimes the data you gather from devices is meaningful only when
you:
For information about how values are rounded, see page 7-3.
Expression components
Expressions can be built from:
tag values.
tag placeholders.
constants.
if-then-else logic.
Expressions that use if-then-else logic can return numeric values, true/
false values, or text strings, depending on how they are structured.
These are called conditional expressions because the result of the
expression depends on whether the If statement is true or false. When
the If statement evaluates to true, the result is defined by the Then
Creating expressions ■
19–3
open the Expression editor, and then create the expression in the
editor, as described on page 19-7.
The Expression editor allows you to see more text at once, which is
useful for longer, more complicated expressions. Also, you can click
buttons to enter tag names, operators, and functions, thus avoiding
typing mistakes. Another advantage of using the Expression editor is
that you can check whether the syntax of the expression you’ve created
is valid.
Expressions that you type directly are not checked for syntax.
Click the Browse button in the Exprn column for a control that
accepts expressions.
Browse button in the Exprn
column
The Browse button is not available for controls to which you can
assign only tags.
Expression box
The Expression box is a text edit area where you can build expressions.
Type text directly and use the expression buttons to build the
expression.
Creating expressions ■
19–5
Expression buttons
These are the expression buttons:
If If-then-else operators
Logical Logical operators
Relational Relational operators
Arithmetic Arithmetic operators
Bitwise Bitwise operators
Functions Mathematical and security functions (clicking the
button opens the Functions box)
Tags Tags in the Tag Browser.
Validation area
To validate your expression, click the Check Syntax button. You can
check the syntax as often as you like. When you make changes, the
expression is no longer validated.
If an expression has not been validated, the text box remains empty.
Cursor position
The Line and Column boxes show the cursor position in the
Expression box.
Create an expression.
2. To use a tag in the expression, you can type the tag name directly
or click Tags and then select the tag to use.
Creating expressions ■
19–7
4. To use a function, click Functions.
Click the
type of
functions to
display.
5. In the Functions box, click the function to use, and then click OK.
If your expression has a syntax error, the line and column location
appears beside the Check Syntax button.
Formatting expressions
You can format expressions so they are easier to read. However, do not
let tag names, function names, or function arguments span more than
one line.
When formatting expressions, you can use line returns and multiple
spaces.
Enclose strings in quotes. The string can contain any character, and can
include spaces.
if (tag1 > tag2) then 0 else if (tag1 > tag3) then 2 else 4
Creating expressions ■
19–9
Type a tag name.
You can type a tag name that does not exist in the tag database.
When you click OK, you are prompted to create the tag. You can
create it now, or write down the name and create it later.
Click the Tags button and select a tag from the Tag Browser.
Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces
{ } when you use them in an expression. This distinguishes the
characters in the tag name from the characters in the expression.
You can use string tags as operands with the plus (+) arithmetic
operator and with the relational operators.
the graphic display that opens when the application is first run.
The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name, including folder
names. For example, you could create a parameter file specifying that
the tag placeholder #1=Folder1. You could assign the folder and a tag
name to a graphic object’s control: #1\Tag1.
Constants
A constant can have any of the following formats:
integer (123)
floating-point (123.45)
Arithmetic operators
Arithmetic operators perform math on two or more numeric values
and calculate the result. The arithmetic operators are:
Creating expressions ■
19–11
Symbol Operator Example
(For these examples, tag1=5
and tag2=7)
String operands
The + operator can be used to join string operands. For example, the
expression “hello” + “world” returns: helloworld.
Relational operators
Logical operators
Logical operators determine the validity of one or more statements.
There are three logical operators: AND, OR, and NOT. The operators
return a non-zero value if the expression is true, or a 0 if the expression
is false.
Creating expressions ■
19–13
Any statement that evaluates to a non-zero value is regarded as true.
For example, the statement tag1 is false if the value of tag1 is 0, and true
if tag1 has any other value.
Creating expressions ■
19–15
Symbol Operator Action (for examples, see page 19-19)
>> right shift Shifts the bits within an integer or tag to the
right.
where dev is a tag whose value is being shifted left, and 65535 is 1111
1111 1111 1111 in binary form.
tag1 | tag2
Returns 7 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0111).
tag1 ^ tag2
Returns 7 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0111).
tag1 >> 1
Returns 2 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0010).
tag1 << 1
Returns 10 (binary 0000 0000 0000 1010).
~ tag1
Returns -6 (binary 1111 1111 1111 1010).
Creating expressions ■
19–17
Evaluation order of operators
Expressions with more than one operator are evaluated in this order:
1 (highest) ()
2 NOT
~
3 *
/
MOD, %
**
AND, &&
&
>>
<<
4 +
-
OR, ||
|
^
5 (lowest) EQ, ==
NE, <>
LT, <
GT, >
LE, <=
GE, >=
_____________________________
3. 0 AND 1 = 0
_____________________________
2. tag1 > 1 = 1
_____________________________
1. NOT tag1 = 0
2. 0 AND tag2 = 0
3. tag3 ** 2 = 100
4. 0 > 100 = 0
Creating expressions ■
19–19
The expression evaluates to 0 (false).
Mathematical functions
Use math functions to calculate the square root, log (natural or base
10), or trigonometry ratios (in radians or degrees) of a tag.
Security functions
Use security functions to control access to your application.
If-then-else
If-then-else expressions carry out an action conditionally or branch
actions depending on the statements in the expression. The if-then-else
statements enable the expression to perform different actions in
different situations and to repeat activities until a condition changes.
Creating expressions ■
19–21
If the statement is true then the expression returns value1; if the
statement is false then the expression returns value2. If the result of the
statement is a non-zero value, the statement is true (and returns
value1); if the result is 0, the statement is false (and returns value2).
Nested if-then-else
You can also nest an if-then-else structure inside the then or else part
of an if-then-else structure.
if statement1 then
if statement2 then value1
else value2
else value3
Creating expressions ■
19–23
has this interpretation:
You can use write expressions with the numeric input enable button.
When the operator presses the button, a keypad or scratchpad opens.
The operator enters a value in the keypad or scratchpad, and this value
is substituted for the ? placeholder in the write expression.
Then the operator presses the numeric input enable button and enters
the value for the conveyor speed in a numeric pop-up keypad. The ?
character in the write expression is the placeholder for the value the
operator enters.
if Feet_or_meters == 0 then
else
? * 3.281
Creating expressions ■
19–25
RSView writes the result of the expression to the Conveyor_speed tag
at the data source.
20 Creating embedded
variables
This chapter describes:
For example, you could embed a tag value and the time variable in a
local message. At run time when the local message is displayed, it is
updated to reflect the tag’s current value as the value changes. The time
is also updated as the time changes.
string tags.
the time.
the date.
The Caption box is on the Label tab or the States tab, depending on
the type of object.
For text objects, use the Text box on the General tab.
5. Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens, as described in the
following sections.
4. Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens, as described in the
following sections.
To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, click the Browse button.
Browse button Number of digits Select the maximum number of digits to display,
up to 17 digits. The decimal point and minus sign each count as a
digit.
Fill left with Select a character to fill the left of the display with if
the value at the data source contains fewer than the maximum
number of digits. If you don’t want to use a fill character, select
None.
where
Tag_name is the tag to display; you can also type a tag placeholder here.
To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, click the Browse button.
Fixed number of characters Check this box if you want the
Browse button
variable to always display the same number of characters, and then
select the number of characters to display, up to 255.
If you clear this box, the length of the embedded variable changes
to accommodate the length of the string tag’s value.
3. Click OK.
/*S:# Tag_name*/
where
Tag_name is the tag to display; you can also type a tag placeholder here.
/*S:20 Blower_status*/
2. Select the time and date format to display. The options include
time only and date only.
3. Click OK.
/*Time_date_format*/
where
SD Short date
LD Long date
SDT Short date and time
LDT Long date and time
T Time
TSD Time and short date
TLD Time and long date
To display the time followed by the short date, you would type this:
/*TSD*/
A space is placed between the time and date when the embedded
variable is displayed at run time.
3. Click OK.
Click the embedded variable to select it, and then press Delete.
At run time, this is how embedded variables are displayed and updated:
If there is no valid data available for the embedded variable, the variable
is replaced with question marks (?). This could occur when a display
first opens and the data has not arrived yet, or when there is a problem
that prevents communication with the data source.
If a string or numeric embedded variable has been set up but no tag has
been assigned, the embedded variable is replaced with asterisks (*).
For more information about how values are rounded, see page 7-3.
Number formats
The numeric variable uses the number format you set up on the run-
time computer. For example, if the run-time computer is set up to use
a comma for the decimal symbol, the numeric variable uses a comma
for the decimal symbol.
Null characters have a hex value of 0. The null character indicates the
end of string input. It does not add to the actual string length.
Time and date embedded variables use the time and date formats you
set up on the run-time computer. For example, if you specify the short
date format, at run time the display uses the short date format that the
run-time computer uses.
21 Creating macros
This chapter describes:
creating macros.
Tag1 = 8
Sets the value of Tag1 to 8.
Tag1 = Tag2
Sets the value of Tag1 to be the same as Tag2.
Tag1 = Tag1 + 1
Increases the value of Tag1 by 1.
At run time, when the macro runs, the values are sent to the tags at the
data source.
TotalProductionUnits=0
LineDownTime=0
TotalRejects=0
At run time when the operator presses the Reset Production Data
button, the display opens and the macro runs. When the operator
presses OK the display closes.
RSView allows you to create up to five macros for use with global
connections. The macros must be named Macro1, Macro2, Macro3,
Macro4, and Macro5 in order to work with global connections.
Creating macros ■
21–3
Example: Using macros to reset tag values
This example shows you how to run a macro whenever the operator
needs to reset production information tags to known values.
The macro writes the desired values to the tags whenever the operator
presses a momentary push button.
TotalProductionUnits=0
LineDownTime=0
TotalRejects=0
When the operator presses the Reset Production Data button, the value
of the ResetProdData tag changes from 0 to 1. This tells RSView to run
Macro1, which writes the specified values to the tags in the macro.
To create a macro
2. In the Tag column, type the name of the tag to assign a value to, or
click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag.
Browse button in
the Tags column
Creating macros ■
21–5
3. In the Expression column, type a tag name, expression, or numeric
value, or click the Browse button to open the Expression editor
and create an expression.
7. Click Close.
22 Setting up display
navigation
This chapter describes:
The term display navigation refers to the way the operator moves
between the graphic displays that make up an application.
Create graphic objects that the operator can use to navigate the
application.
In the Startup editor, specify the graphic display to open when the
application starts.
Once you set up display navigation for your application, test the
application to make sure that navigation flows smoothly and that you
have avoided problems like these:
Display type
The display type you use gives you additional control over how the
operator navigates between displays. For example, use the On Top type
to keep a graphic display on top at all times, even when another display
has focus. Or use the Replace type if you want a display to replace all
other open displays when it opens.
For information about specifying the display type, see page 14-14.
When you set up a goto display button, specify the graphic display to
open when the operator presses the button at run time.
The specified display doesn’t open if the operator does not have
security access for the display.
You can also assign a parameter file that assigns tags to tag placeholders
in the display when the display opens. For more information about
parameter files, see page 14-33.
The goto display button’s behavior at run time also depends on which
types of graphic displays are already open and which type of display it
is opening:
If the display assigned to the button is already open, but does not
have focus, pressing the button gives the display focus.
The operator cannot use the goto display button to open Replace
displays if display change is currently controlled remotely (using global
connections). But the operator can still open On Top displays.
When the operator presses a return to display button at run time, the
graphic display that the button is on closes and the display that was
previously open reopens.
the operator does not have security access for the previous display.
This can only occur if a new user logs in using a login button in the
current display.
The return to display button only goes back to the most recent display.
It doesn’t go back through a series of displays.
Both the current display and the previous display must be Replace
displays. When the operator presses the return to display button:
1. In the Main Menu display, the operator uses a display list selector
to open the Process Overview display.
3. After viewing the state of the process, the operator presses a return
to display button to close the current display and reopen the
Process Overview display.
If the graphic display that is closing is a Replace display, and the display
change is controlled remotely, the display does not close. If the display
does not close, the close value, if any, is not written out.
The specified display doesn’t open if the operator does not have
security access for the display.
You can also assign a parameter file that assigns tags to tag placeholders
in the display when the display opens. For more information about
parameter files, see page 14-33.
For information about setting up display list selectors, see page 16-164.
The display list selector’s behavior at run time also depends on which
types of graphic displays are already open and which type of display it
is opening:
The operator can scroll through the list and select displays using the key
button graphic objects, or, if the list has the input focus, by using the
arrow keys and Enter key on a keypad or external keyboard.
You can link key buttons to a specific display list selector, or set up the
buttons to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display.
For information about input focus, see page 16-15. For information
about linking buttons to the display list selector, see page 16-17.
Shutdown buttons
When the operator presses the shutdown button at run time, the
application stops and RSView ME Station closes.
To control display changes remotely, you can set up the data source to
open graphic displays using global connections.
23 Specifying startup
settings, testing
applications, and creating
run-time applications
This chapter describes:
You can specify startup settings once you’ve set up all the parts of the
application, or you can specify processes and select components in the
Startup editor as you create them.
Specifying startup settings, testing applications, and creating run-time applications ■ 23–1
To specify startup settings
Data logging Check this box to start data logging when the
application starts. Select the data log model to use from the list of
models in the application.
Startup macro Check this box to use a startup macro. The startup
macro assigns values to tags when the application starts. Select the
macro to use from the list of macros in the application.
Parameter file for the initial graphic Check this box to use a
parameter file to replace tag placeholders in the graphic display that
3. Click OK.
You can test your application in RSView Studio at any time during the
development process, to make sure that everything works the way you
intend.
The procedure in this section shows you how to test your entire
application. For information about testing a single graphic display, see
page 14-13.
Make sure you provide the operator with a method for shutting
down the application at run time. For more information about
methods for shutting down applications, see page 25-44.
Once you’ve tested your application to make sure everything works the
way you intend, create the run-time application file and transfer the file
to the run-time computer.
3. If desired, in the File name box, type a different name for the run-
time application file.
4. Click Save.
24 Running applications in
Windows 2000 or
Windows XP
This chapter describes:
specifying the time, date, and number formats to use at run time.
Summary of steps
Follow these steps to:
If you are using RSLinx for RSView as the OPC server on the run-
time computer, install RSLinx for RSView on the run-time
Once you’ve completed these steps, you’re ready to run the application.
For information about running your application, see Chapter 27.
You can:
if the application file is too large to fit on a floppy disk, use a larger
storage device such as a Zip disk.
Before running your application for the first time, use the RSView ME
Station dialog box to:
set up the communication driver to use at run time (if you have not
already done so).
3. Click Open.
If you cannot see the device you want, use the up and down arrows.
When the device goes off the screen to the right, press CTRL and
the right or left arrows on the scrollbar.
2. Click KEPWare Serial Port IDs, and then click the enter key.
3. In the KepServer Serial Port ID’s box, click the serial port ID you
specified when you set up the KEPServerEnterprise channel.
4. Click the driver you want to edit, and then click Edit Driver.
Once the driver is set up, RSView ME Station automatically starts the
driver software when you run the application.
5. Click OK.
When you start RSView ME Station, you can use startup parameters to:
On the Windows Start menu, click Run. In the Open box, type the
path to the MERuntime.exe file.
To search for the file, click Browse. When you’ve specified the file
to open, click OK.
When you start RSView ME Station, you can use startup parameters to
start running an application at the same time, and to automatically
delete an application’s log files before running the application.
For more information about deleting data log files, see page 24-18.
To use the startup parameters, you must specify both the path to the
MERuntime.exe file and the path to the application’s .mer file.
2. In the Open box, type the path to the MERuntime.exe file, then a
space, then the path to the application’s .mer file, followed by the
startup parameters to use. If the paths contain spaces, enclose
them in double quotes.
If you accepted the default file locations, you would type this:
If you don’t want to delete the application’s log files, omit the /d
parameter. If you don’t want to replace the terminals’
communication configuration, omit the /o parameter.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Next.
5. Click the Startup folder (in the Start menu\Programs folder), and
then click Next.
7. Click OK.
2. In Windows 2000, click the Advanced tab, and then click Add.
3. In the “Type the location of the item” box, type the path to the
MERuntime.exe file, then a space, then the path to the
application’s .mer file, followed by the startup parameters to use. If
the paths contain spaces, enclose them in double quotes.
If you accepted the default file locations, you would type this:
If you don’t want to delete the application’s log files, omit the /d
parameter. If you don’t want to replace the terminals’
communication configuration, omit the /o parameter.
4. Click Next.
5. Click the Startup folder (in the Start menu\Programs folder), and
then click Next.
6. Type a name for the shortcut, such as the application name, and
then click Finish.
7. Click OK.
For more information about the alarm log file, see page 9-9. For more
information about data log files, see page 11-2.
In the RSView ME Station dialog box, click Yes to Delete log files
before running. Click No to keep the log files.
All alarm and data log files for the selected application are deleted.
3. Click Yes to Delete all log files on the run-time computer. Click No
to keep all log files on the run-time computer.
Only log files for data log models that use the default path are deleted
when you use this option. All alarm log files are deleted.
For more information about data log files, see page 11-2.
Time, date, and number formats are used by these graphic objects:
numeric display
gauges
trend
alarm banner
alarm list
You can also change these formats after the application is running, but
you must shut down and restart the application for the changes to take
effect.
3. Specify the locale to use, and then select the number, time, and
date settings to use.
This tool can have far-reaching effects on your operating system. The
DeskLock tool replaces the standard Windows 2000 or Windows XP
non-configured desktop with a customized desktop. The customized
desktop is intended to prevent operators from having access to other
applications and operating system functions such as restarting
Windows or shutting down tasks.
For details about using the tool, see the tool’s Help.
Running applications
If the application is set up to use a title bar with a Control box, click
the Close button at the right end of the title bar.
Control menu
Close button
If you assigned a shutdown macro (in the Startup editor), the macro
runs, assigning values to tags, and then the application stops.
25 Running applications on a
PanelView Plus or
VersaView CE terminal
This chapter describes:
specifying the time, date, and number formats to use at run time.
running applications.
Summary of steps
Follow these steps to:
3. If you are using an OPC server other than RSLinx for RSView,
install the OPC server software on the PanelView Plus or
VersaView CE terminal.
If you are using RSLinx for RSView as the OPC server on the
VersaView CE terminal, install RSLinx for RSView on the
VersaView CE.
Use the RSView ME Station dialog box to perform the tasks described
in this chapter. The dialog box opens when you start RSView ME
Station.
Before running your application for the first time, use the RSView ME
Station dialog box to:
You can download the run-time application file to the PanelView Plus
or VersaView CE terminal using:
Ethernet
If you are using an Ethernet connection for the transfer, you don’t need
to set up a driver for the transfer, since the Ethernet driver is selected
and loaded by default.
3. Click the device you want to set up and then click Edit Device.
5. Click the Driver you want to set up and then click Edit Driver.
7. Click Close.
You are prompted to restart the computer for the changes to take
effect.
For information about using the Transfer Utility, see the next section.
Serial downloads
To perform a serial download, make sure the terminal is connected to
the development computer using the correct cable:
8. Click the + beside the driver to use for the download, and then
click the PanelView Plus or VersaView CE terminal to which to
download the application file or Windows True Type font file.
If the application file already exists at the destination, you are given
the opportunity to replace it.
Use the Transfer Utility to upload your run-time application from the
PanelView Plus or VersaView CE terminal to the development
computer. Run-time applications have the extension .mer.
Serial uploads
3. In the Source storage type box, select the storage device type. For
more information about the source storage types, see Help.
5. To use a different name for the application file at run time, check
the “Upload as” box and then type the new name.
7. Click the + beside the driver to use for the upload, and then click
the PanelView Plus or VersaView CE terminal to upload the
application file from.
If the application file already exists at the destination, you are given
the opportunity to replace it.
You can use the Transfer Utility tool to compare an application on the
development computer with an application on the terminal. The
comparison tool can tell you whether the files are identical or different.
To compare applications
4. In the Remote Storage Type list, select the storage location of the
application on the terminal.
If you are unable to find your file at the location you specified, try
changing the Remote Storage Type.
7. Click Compare.
3. Click Load.
4. In the Select Device dialog, navigate through the tree, click the
device you want the shortcut to point to, and then click OK.
If you cannot see the device you want, use the up and down arrows.
When the device goes off the screen to the right, press CTRL and
the right or left arrows on the scrollbar.
3. Type the address and the port for the Remote Log.
4. Click OK.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
3. Click a length of time (in minutes) before the screen saver turns on
automatically. You can also disable the screen saver, and set the
screen saver intensity.
4. Click OK.
4. Click the name of the file to copy, and then click Copy.
2. Double-click Keyboard.
4. Click a Repeat Delay, and then type a Repeat Rate. A Repeat Rate
of 0 disables Key Repeats.
5. Click OK.
8. Click OK.
2. Double-click Keypad.
4. Click a Repeat Delay, and then type a Repeat Rate. A Repeat Rate
of 0 disables Key Repeats.
9. Click OK.
2. Double-click Mouse.
5. Click OK.
3. Double-click Calibration.
3. Double-click Cursor
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK.
3. Click Close.
1. In the Serial properties dialog box, click the property you want to
edit, and then click Edit.
1. In the DHPlus Properties dialog box, click the property you want
to edit, and then click Edit.
Station number Select the station number setting for the source
DHPlus device, from 0 to 77 (octal).
Jumper ID Select the card jumper ID.
Baud rateSelect the baud rate (speed) to use for
DHPluscommunications.
4. Click the name of the device you want to edit, and then click Edit
Device.
5. In the Edit Device Address dialog box, type the new address, and
then click OK.
The settings available in this dialog box are determined by the type
of device you selected in the previous step.
3. In the Serial Port IDs box, click the serial port ID you specified
when you set up the KEPServerEnterprise channel.
You can set up print options for graphic displays, the alarm log, and the
diagnostic log.
When you start RSView ME Station, you can use startup parameters to:
You can also set up RSView ME Station to start automatically when the
PanelView Plus or VersaView CE terminal is turned on.
On the Windows Start menu, click Run. In the Open box, type this:
To search for the file, click Browse. When you’ve specified the file
to open, click OK.
6. Click OK.
When you start RSView ME Station, you can use startup parameters to
start running an application at the same time, and to automatically
delete an application’s log files before running the application.
For more information about deleting data log files, see page 25-42.
You can use the /r parameter alone, or with the /d parameter. You
cannot use the /d parameter alone.
To use the startup parameters, you must specify both the path to the
MERuntime.exe file and the path to the application's .mer file.
If you don’t want to delete the application’s log files, omit the /d
parameter.
3. Click OK.
Storage Card is the only permanent directory on the VersaView CE. All
other directories are stored in volatile memory, and are wiped out when
Windows shuts down. When you restart Windows, the terminal
recreates the other directories using information stored in the Storage
Card directory.
This means that changes you make to the Windows desktop are not
permanent unless you store the changes in the Storage Card directory.
3. In the Target box, type a space at the end of the existing text, and
then type this:
If you don’t want to delete the application’s log files, omit the /d
parameter.
3. Click a message, and then click More Details to see the entire
message.
5. Click OK.
You can use the RSView ME Station dialog box to view the battery
voltage, battery state, power on time, available memory and processor
temperature of the terminal.
4. Click Close.
5. Click the Up and Down buttons to change the allocated and in use
Storage and Program memory levels.
6. Click OK.
numeric displays
gauges
trends
alarm banner
alarm list
The time and date formats are also used when printing the alarm
history report (using the print alarm history button).
You can also change these formats after the application is running, but
you must shut down and restart the application for the changes to take
effect.
3. Specify the time zone to use, and then specify the date, regional
settings, and time.
4. Click close.
When you run your application, RSView ME Station stores log files for
alarms and data logging (if you use these features). When you start
RSView ME Station, you can delete the alarm and data log files for the
selected application, or for all the applications on the run-time
computer.
If you run a newer version of an application, the alarm log file for the
older version is deleted automatically. The data log file for the older
version is retained, to allow the display of historical data in trends.
For more information about the alarm log file, see page 9-9. For more
information about data log files, see page 11-2.
In the RSView ME Station dialog box, click Yes to Delete log files
before running. Click No to keep the log files.
All alarm and data log files for the selected application are deleted.
5. Click Yes to Delete all log files on the run-time computer. Click No
to keep all log files on the run-time computer.
Only log files for data log models that use the default path are deleted
when you use this option. All alarm log files are deleted.
For more information about data log files, see page 11-2.
Running applications
If the application is set up to use a title bar with a Control box, click
the Close button at the right end of the title bar.
Control box
Control menu
Close button
If you assigned a shutdown macro (in the Startup editor), the macro
runs, assigning values to tags, and then the application stops.
26 Running applications on a
MobileView terminal
This chapter describes:
specifying the time, date, and number formats to use at run time.
running applications.
Summary of steps
Follow these steps to:
If you are using RSLinx for RSView as the OPC server on the
MobileView terminal, install RSLinx for RSView.
Ethernet
If you are using an Ethernet connection for the transfer, you don’t need
to set up a driver for the transfer, since the Ethernet driver is selected
and loaded by default.
If you are using a serial connection for the transfer, specify and set up
the driver.
3. Click the Device you want to set up and then click Edit Device.
5. Click the Driver you want to set up and then click Edit Driver.
7. Click Close.
You are prompted to restart the computer for the changes to take
effect.
For information about using the Transfer Utility, see the next section.
Serial downloads
To perform a serial download, make sure the terminal is connected to
the development computer using the correct cable:
8. In the left pane, click the + beside the driver to use for the
download, and then click the MobileView terminal to which to
download the application file or Windows True Type font file.
Information about the selected computer is displayed in the right
pane.
To change the format of the list, click the icon and list buttons.
If the application file already exists at the destination, you are given
the opportunity to replace it.
Serial uploads
To perform a serial upload, make sure the terminal is connected to the
development computer using the correct cable:
3. In the Source storage type box, select the storage device type. For
more information about the source storage types, see Help.
5. To use a different name for the application file at run time, check
the “Upload as” box and then type the new name.
7. In the left pane, click the + beside the driver to use for the upload,
and then click the MobileView terminal to upload the application
file from. Information about the selected computer is displayed in
the right pane.
To change the format of the list, click the icon and list buttons.
If the application file already exists at the destination, you are given
the opportunity to replace it.
Comparing applications
You can use the Transfer Utility tool to compare an application on the
development computer with an application on the terminal. The
comparison tool can tell you whether the files are identical or different.
To compare applications
3. In the Local file box, type the location of the run-time application
file (with the extension .mer) on the development computer.
4. In the Remote Storage Type list, select the storage location of the
application on the terminal.
If you are unable to find your file at the location you specified, try
changing the Remote Storage Type.
7. Click Compare.
Use the RSView ME Station dialog box to perform the tasks described
in this chapter. The dialog box opens when you start RSView ME
Station.
Before running your application for the first time, use the RSView ME
Station dialog box to:
3. Click Load.
4. In the Select Device dialog, navigate through the tree, click the
device you want the shortcut to point to, and then click OK.
If you cannot see the device you want, use the up and down arrows.
When the device goes off the screen to the right, press CTRL and
the right or left arrows on the scrollbar.
3. Type the address and the port for the Remote Log.
4. Click OK.
4. Click the name of the file to copy, and then click Copy.
4. Click the name of the file to delete, and then click delete.
3. Click Close.
1. In the Serial properties dialog box, click the property you want to
edit, and then click Edit.
Comm port Select the COM port to which the serial cable is
attached on the run-time computer.
Station number Select the station number setting for the source
DF1 device, from 0 to 77 (octal) or 0 to 31 (decimal). Whether the
number is octal or decimal depends on the device type.
1. In the DHPlus Properties dialog box, click the property you want
to edit, and then click Edit.
Station number Select the station number setting for the source
DF1 device, from 0 to 77 (octal).
Jumper ID Select the card jumper ID. This ID is used to identify
the card if there are multiple cards installed on the MobileView
terminal.
Baud rateSelect the baud rate (speed) to use for serial
communications.
4. Click the name of the device you want to edit, and then click Edit
Device.
5. In the Edit Device Address dialog box, type the new address, and
then click OK.
The settings available in this dialog box are determined by the type
of device you selected in the previous step.
3. In the Serial Port IDs box, click the serial port ID you specified
when you set up the KEPServerEnterprise channel.
When you start RSView ME Station, you can use startup parameters to:
You can also set up RSView ME Station to start automatically when the
MobileView terminal is turned on.
On the Windows Start menu, click Run. In the Open box, type this:
To search for the file, click Browse. When you've specified the file
to open, click OK.
For more information about deleting data log files, see page 26-38.
You can use the /r parameter alone, or with the /d parameter. You
cannot use the /d parameter alone.
To use the startup parameters, you must specify both the path to the
MERuntime.exe file and the path to the application’s .mer file.
If you don’t want to delete the application’s log files, omit the /d
parameter.
3. Click OK.
This means that changes you make to the Windows desktop are not
permanent unless you store the changes in the Flash Storage directory.
3. In the Target box, type a space at the end of the existing text, and
then type this:
If you don’t want to delete the application’s log files, omit the /d
parameter.
4. Click OK.
numeric displays
gauges
trends
alarm banner
alarm list
The time and date formats are also used when printing the alarm
history report (using the print alarm history button).
You can also change these formats after the application is running, but
you must shut down and restart the application for the changes to take
effect.
3. Specify the locale to use, and then select the number, time, and
date settings to use.
When you run your application, RSView ME Station stores log files for
alarms and data logging (if you use these features). When you start
RSView ME Station, you can delete the alarm and data log files for the
selected application, or for all the applications on the run-time
computer.
If you run a newer version of an application, the alarm log file for the
older version is deleted automatically. The data log file for the older
version is retained, to allow the display of historical data in trends.
For more information about the alarm log file, see page 9-9. For more
information about data log files, see page 11-2.
In the RSView ME Station dialog box, click Yes to Delete log files
before running. Click No to keep the log files.
All alarm and data log files for the selected application are deleted.
Only log files for data log models that use the default path are deleted
when you use this option. All alarm log files are deleted.
For more information about data log files, see page 11-2.
Running applications
If the application is set up to use a title bar with a Control box, click
the Close button at the right end of the title bar.
Control menu
Close button
If you assigned a shutdown macro (in the Startup editor), the macro
runs, assigning values to tags, and then the application stops.
2. Double-click Network.
4. Type a user name, password, and domain name, and then click
OK.
To log in, the user must have an account in the User Accounts editor.
If security is set up, the user must also have a password.
The string pop-up keyboard opens. For details about using the
keyboard, see page 27-12.
6. To close the Login window and complete the login, press Enter.
If the previous user did not log out, the previous user is logged out
now. If a logout macro is set up for the previous user, the logout
macro runs, assigning values to tags.
If a login macro is set up for the new user, the macro runs, assigning
values to tags.
If the graphic display changes remotely before the user has finished
logging in, the login is cancelled.
If the user name or password doesn’t match the settings in the User
Accounts editor, the user is not logged in.
If the screen resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 208 pixels
high, the string pop-up keyboard cannot open.
When the current user logs out, the DEFAULT user is logged in.
To log out
The operator can enter or ramp numeric values at run time using the
numeric input enable button or the numeric input cursor point.
When the operator presses the button or activates the cursor point, the
numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad opens. If you set the button or
cursor point up to ramp, pressing the object gives it focus, but does not
open a pop-up window.
For information about setting up the numeric input enable button, see
page 16-109. For information about setting up the numeric input
cursor point, see page 16-123.
numbers from 0 to 9
Scratchpad area
When the keypad is open, no other objects in the graphic display can
accept input.
Scratchpad area
The scratchpad does not contain any buttons. If the run-time computer
does not have an external keyboard or keypad attached, the operator
will be unable to enter values or close the scratchpad.
If the button or cursor point is being used to ramp a value at the Value
control:
When the tag assigned to the Value control is an integer tag, but the
ramp value is a floating point value, the ramp value is added to (or
subtracted from) the Value control value, and then the result is
rounded and written to the Value control.
For information about how values are rounded, see page 7-3.
If the operator presses and holds down the move up or move down
button, or the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key on the keyboard or
keypad, the button or key goes into auto repeat mode. The ramp
For more information about auto repeat mode, see page 16-22.
If ramping the button or cursor point would cause the value at the
Value control to exceed the maximum value, or be less than the
minimum value, a message is written to the Diagnostics List and the
value at the Value control is not changed.
For example, if the entered value is 9.25, the stripped value is 925.
If the stripped value is within the range, the stripped value is sent to
the Value control (or substituted for the ? in the Optional
Expression).
For information about how values are rounded, see page 7-3.
Problems with the numeric pop-up keypad and scratchpad occur under
these circumstances:
If the graphic display changes remotely before the user has pressed
the Enter button, the pop-up window closes without writing out a
value.
If the screen resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 240 pixels
high, the pop-up keypad cannot open.
If the value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the
Value control, the pop-up window remains open and the value is
not written to the control. The scratchpad area changes to red to
alert the operator of the error.
The operator can enter string values at run time using the string input
enable button.
When the operator presses the button, the string pop-up keyboard or
scratchpad opens, depending on how you set up the button. To use the
scratchpad, a keyboard must be attached to the run-time computer.
For information about setting up the string input enable button, see
page 16-139.
The string pop-up keyboard opens when the operator presses a string
input enable button or the User or Password button in the Login dialog
box.
Scratchpad area
Scratchpad area
The scratchpad does not contain any buttons. If the run-time computer
does not have an external keyboard attached, the operator will be
unable to enter characters or close the scratchpad (unless the run-time
terminal is a keypad terminal). If the run-time terminal is a keypad
terminal, the operator can enter numbers (not letters) in the scratchpad,
and close the scratchpad.
When the string is written to the Value control, the first character is
placed in the high order byte of the first word at the tag address, the
second character is placed in the low order byte of the first word, and
so on.
Problems with the string pop-up keyboard and scratchpad occur under
these circumstances:
If the graphic display changes remotely before the user has pressed
the Enter button, the pop-up window closes without writing out a
string.
If the screen resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 208 pixels
high, the pop-up keyboard cannot open.
The operator uses these objects to start and stop plant operations, and
to control machines and processes. Choose the objects that best suit
your process. Set up the data source to carry out the desired actions in
response to the changes in tag values.
The operator can use function keys with all of these objects except
control list selectors, third-party ActiveX objects, and drawing objects
with slider animation. The last three types of objects can be pressed
using a mouse or touch screen.
You can also use macros to assign values to tags. For more information,
see Chapter 21.
For information about creating graphic objects, see Chapter 15. For
information about setting up graphic objects, see Chapter 16.
The operator can view tag data at run time using these graphic objects:
String display String tag values. For example, set up the data
source to generate strings that report on the state
of a process or operation, or that provide the
operator with instructions about what to do next.
Bar graph Numeric values in bar graph format. The bar
graph increases or decreases in size to show the
changing value.
Gauge Numeric values in dial format. The gauge’s needle
moves around the dial to show the changing
value.
Multistate indicator The state of a process, on a panel that changes its
color, image, or caption to indicate the current
state. Each state is set up to correspond to a
numeric tag value or Least Significant Bit.
Symbol The state of a process, using a monochrome
image that changes color to indicate the current
state. Each state is set up to correspond to a
numeric tag value or Lease Significant Bit.
For information about creating graphic objects, see Chapter 15. For
information about setting up graphic objects, see Chapter 16.
To display the current date and time, create a time and date display. This
object uses the operating system’s date and time and therefore does not
use tags or expressions.
A Converting PanelBuilder
1400e applications
This appendix describes:
Summary of steps
Follow these steps to convert PanelBuilder 1400e applications:
For example, if you want the application to have a border around its
graphic displays, or to use a title bar, you can specify these options
in the Project Settings editor.
You can convert the PanelBuilder 1400e application when you open
RSView Studio, or once RSView Studio is already open.
2. In the New tab, in the Application name box, type a name for your
converted application, up to 32 characters long.
Browse button 7. Navigate to the directory where the PanelBuilder 1400e application
file is stored, and then click the file name.
10. If you are converting to a new window size, specify the window
size in the Size box.
11. If you select Custom size, type the width and height of the window
size in pixels.
If you select Convert to new windows size, check the position of the
graphic objects in each display.
Increment Value Button Ramp button During conversion the button is set up to
increment.
Decrement Value Button Ramp button During conversion the button is set up to
decrement.
Increment Value Button Ramp button and The Increment Value Button with Display is
with Display numeric display divided into two separate RSView objects.
Decrement Value Button Ramp button and The Increment Value Button with Display is
with Display numeric display divided into two separate RSView objects.
ASCII Input (small and String input enable
large) button
Numeric Entry Keypad Numeric input enable
(small and large) button
Screen List Selector’s list Display list selector The PanelBuilder 1400e Screen List Selector is
divided into four separate RSView graphic
objects.
Screen List Selector’s Enter button
Enter Key
Screen List Selector’s Move down button
Down Cursor
Screen List Selector’s Up Move up button
Cursor
Control List Selector’s Control list selector The PanelBuilder 1400e Control List Selector
list is divided into four separate RSView graphic
objects.
Control List Selector’s Enter button
Enter Key
This section describes PanelBuilder 1400e settings and controls that are
not used in RSView.
RSView does not use these PanelBuilder 1400e features and settings to
manage alarms:
alarm relays
Block tags
Block tags are not supported in RSView. Block tags that are monitored
for alarms in your PanelBuilder 1400e application are converted to bit
arrays. For information about monitoring bit arrays for alarm
conditions, see Chapter 9.
RSView does not use nodes for communications. Nodes are converted
to RSLinx topics. Topics are then converted into device shortcuts, to
Tags are converted to HMI tags within the RSLinx topics. The
Unsolicited_Msgs node is not converted.
Modbus communications
Tags that use these protocols are converted to memory tags. Once you
have set up communications for your converted application, change the
memory tags to device tags that point to the correct addresses. For
information about editing tags, see Chapter 7.
Bit Position
Tags that use these data types are converted to analog tags with the
Default data type. The Default data type uses floating point values.
Image, text, arc, ellipse, Blinking wallpaper If you want an object to blink at run time,
line, panel, rectangle, objects unlock the wallpaper.
wedge
In RSView, all of the listed objects except
images and panels use color animation to
blink. For details, see page 17-15.
Numeric Input Cursor PLC Controlled and Use an expression to achieve the same result.
Point, Numeric Keypad Decimal Key Controlled Assign the expression to the object’s Optional
Enable Button decimal point options Expression control. For information about
expressions, see Chapter 19.
Numeric Input Cursor Retain Cursor on Cancel The numeric input cursor point retains focus
Point when the operator cancels entering a numeric
value.
Maintained Push Button, Initial state values If you want to set these objects’ states on
Multistate Push Button, application startup, create a macro to set the
Control List Selector appropriate tag values for the objects’
controls. For information about macros, see
Chapter 21. Assign the macro in the Startup
editor. For details, see page 23-2.
Trend Blinking pens
Date labels on the X- The date is displayed in the title.
Axis You can plot tag values in the background by
Background screen assigning the tags to a data log model. Tags set
plotting up for background screen plotting are
automatically assigned to a data log model on
conversion. However, data log models do not
plot expression values. Therefore, expressions
set up for background screen plotting are not
converted.
All objects Caption and image RSView supports one, three, or nine positions
placement for captions and images, depending on the
type of object. On conversion, captions and
images are positioned using the closest match.
Therefore some captions might overlap
images, some captions might be truncated,
and some images might be clipped to fit the
object.
All objects Multiple image labels RSView supports one image label per object
or state. If a PanelBuilder 1400e object is set
up to use multiple image labels, only the top
left image is converted.
Converting expressions
2. Open the Property Panel, and then click the Connections tab.
For more information about using the Expression editor, see Chapter
19.
Syntax that is not listed in this table or in the next section is okay the
way it is.
Comment REM or ‘ !
Line continuation _ (underscore) not needed
Equality (=) EQ or ==
Bitwise Or Or | (pipe)
varname =
Integer division \ (x - (x MOD y))/y
Endif If then endif If then else 0
Case1...CaseN
CaseElse
EndSelect
Logical Xor (if one or both Xor NOT ((x AND y)
operands are Boolean or OR NOT (x OR y))
Single data types)
Order of precedence
The order of precedence is slightly different in RSView. Check your
expressions to make sure the result is what you intend.
() ()
- (negation) NOT, ~ (tilde)
*, / (floating point *, /, MOD, %, **, AND, &&, &, >>, <<
division)
\ (integer division) +, -, OR, ||, |, ^
MOD EQ, ==, NE, <>, LT, <, GT, >, LE, <=, GE,
>=
+, - (subtraction)
=, <>, <, >, <=, >+
Not
And
Or
Xor
6. Expand the RIO tree, right-click RIO Data, and then click
Configure RIO.
12. Save the converted RIO configuration. You will not be allowed to
save the configuration is there are any invalid RIO configurations.
has a data type of “Bit Position” and its address does not reference
a single bit
has a data type of “Binary” and its address does not reference a
single bit, a single word, or a length or range of 8 or 16 bits specified
has a data type of “Byte” and its address does not have a bit offset
of 0 or 8
has a data type of “Binary” and its address has a length or range of
8 bits specified, but its address does not have a bit offset of 0 or 8
(for block transfer addresses and SLC I/O addresses)
has a data type of “Binary” and its address has a length or range of
16 bits specified, but its address does not have a bit offset of 0
B Converting PanelBuilder
and PanelBuilder32
applications
This appendix describes:
Summary of steps
Follow these steps to convert PanelBuilder applications:
For example, if you want the application to have a border around its
graphic displays, or to use a title bar, you can specify these options
in the Project Settings editor.
You can convert the PanelBuilder application when you open RSView
Studio, or once RSView Studio is already open.
2. In the New tab, in the Application name box, type a name for your
converted application, up to 32 characters long.
4. Click Import.
Browse button 7. Navigate to the directory where the PanelBuilder application file is
stored, and then click the file name.
10. If you are converting to a new window size, specify the window
size in the “Size” box.
11. If you select Custom size, type the width and height of the window
size in pixels.
All the ASCII text strings in the imported application are converted
to their Unicode equivalent text strings during conversion.
If you select Convert to new windows size, check the position of the
graphic objects in each display.
Circular Scale
Scrolling Text
This section describes PanelBuilder settings and controls that are not
used in RSView.
External fonts
PanelBuilder external fonts are not converted. When you convert your
application you can specify the font to use instead, as described on
page B-7.
RSView does not use nodes for communications. Nodes are converted
to RSLinx topics. Topics are then converted into device shortcuts, to
run with RSLinx Enterprise. You must have both RSLinx for RSView
and RSLinx Enterprise installed to make this two-step conversion.
Profibus DP communications
DeviceNet communications
Tags that use these protocols are converted to memory tags. Once you
have set up communications for your converted application, change the
memory tags to device tags that point to the correct addresses. For
information about editing memory tags, see Chapter 7.
For information about monitoring bit arrays for alarm conditions, see
Chapter 9. For information about editing memory tags, see Chapter 7.
Image text, arc, ellipse, Blink property In RSView, all of the listed
freehand, line, polyline, objects except images use color
rectangle, wedge animation to blink. For details,
see page 17-15.
All objects Turn Object View On property If this property is set to False, the
converted object has a
transparent background, no
border, no caption, and no
image.
All objects Blinking inner graphics If the inner graphic uses a color
image, it will not blink. Use a
monochrome image if you want
the inner graphic to blink.
6. Expand the RIO tree, right-click RIO Data, and then click
Configure RIO.
has a data type of “Bit Array” and its address does not have an
“Array Size” of 1, 8, 16, or 32
has a data type of “Bit Array”, and its “Array Size” is 8, but its
address does not have a bit offset of 0 or 8
has a data type of “Bit Array,” and its size is 16 or 32, but its address
does not have a bit offset of 0
C System tags
This appendix describes the system tags.
Alarms
The following tag contains the time and date that the status of alarms
was last reset. The date uses the long date format.
Graphics
The following tags can be used to make graphic objects appear as
though they are blinking on and off:
Also, many objects have a blink property that you can set up. For
information about specific objects, see Chapter 16.
Time
The following tags record time and date information in various
formats:
For information about using the data source to update the system date
and time, or about sending the run-time computer’s date and time to
the data source, see Chapter 8.
User
The following tag contains the name of the current user:
For more information about the security functions, see page 19-20.
System tags ■
C–3
Appendix
D The ODBC
database schemas
This appendix describes the ODBC database format, or schema, for
messages from FactoryTalk Diagnostics. The target table of the ODBC
database to which you are sending messages must use the format
shown in the next section.
TimeStmp The time and date data was logged, in SQL_TIMESTAMP Driver
coordinated universal time (UTC) format. dependent
Encoded as a date variant.
MessageText Message to be logged. SQL_VARCHAR, or 254
SQL_CHAR
Audience A number representing the message SQL_SMALLINT, or 1
audience: SQL_INTEGER
0 for Operator
1 for Engineer
2 for Developer
3 for Secure
0 for Error
1 for Warning
2 for Information
3 for Audit
Area The FactoryTalk path to the area in which SQL_VARCHAR, or 80
the activity occurred. SQL_CHAR
Location The name of the computer where the SQL_VARCHAR, or 15
message was generated. SQL_CHAR
UserID The name of the user (including domain SQL_VARCHAR, or 38
name, if there is one) that initiated the SQL_CHAR
action that caused the diagnostics message.
If the diagnostics message was caused by an
HMI server, the user column contains
“System”.
UserFullName The full name of the user that was logged SQL_VARCHAR, or 255
in when the activity occurred. SQL_CHAR
Provider The name of the product that generated the SQL_VARCHAR, or 20
message. SQL_CHAR
About XML
The Alarm Import Export Wizard allows you to export the existing
alarm setup information to a location you choose, as an XML file. This
file can be opened and edited in Notepad, and then imported into your
application. The default file location is the root of the application’s
directory. For example, for an ME application named “Alarms1”, the
error log would be located at:
IM PO RT AN T If you include attributes for an object whose name does not match
one of those in the graphic display, the attributes for that object are
not imported. Attributes for all other objects in the files whose names
do match those in the graphic display are imported.
The first line of every XML file contains XML version and encoding
attributes. Make sure the encoding attribute matches the format that
you are going to use when you save the file. For example, if the original
file was saved as a UTF-8 and you plan to save it in UTF-16, make sure
the first line specifies attribute=“UTF-16”.
You can export the alarm setup information, and then import the same
configuration to another RSView application, and then modify it to suit
your requirements.
You can use the Alarm XML Import to import an alarm setup that has
been created using an external programming tool or editor, or you can
import an XML file that you originally exported from RSView, and
then modified.
The Alarm Import Export Wizard opens. If the Alarm Setup editor
is open, and you have made changes without saving them, you must
save or discard the changes before you can use the Alarm Import
Export wizard.
<alarms>
</alarms>
The basic structure for an Alarms XML document would look like this:
<alarms>
<alarm>
<triggers>
<trigger id =”T1”>
<trigger id =”T2”>
</triggers>
<messages>
<message id=”M1”>
<message id=”M2”>
</messages>
</alarm>
</alarms>
Alarms element
This is the root, or document element of an RSView alarms XML
document. This element is called alarms in the XML file. It represents
the Alarms Setup configuration and contains all other elements and
collections in the document. If you are editing the exported XML file,
do not edit these attributes.
version = <float>
id = <string> - optional
Alarm element
This element is called alarm in the XML file. The alarm element must
be located within the alarms element. It must not be located within a
triggers or messages element. This element corresponds to the
Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor.
display-name = <string>
silence-tag = <tag>
status-reset-tag = <tag>
close-display-tag = <tag>
Triggers element
This element is called triggers in the XML file. This element
corresponds to the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor. A triggers
element must be located within the alarm element.
id = <string> This attribute does not appear on the Triggers tab of the
Alarm Setup editor. The ID attribute is used to specify the trigger
attribute in the Message element. If you are editing the exported alarms
XML file, the default ID is T<int> where <int> is the number of the
trigger as it appears in the Select triggers box on the Triggers tab.
handshake-tag = <tag>
ack-tag = <tag>
remote-ack-handshake-tag = <tag>
message-tag = <tag>
message-notification-tag = <tag>
Messages element
This element is called messages in the XML file. This element
corresponds to the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor. The
messages element must be located within the alarm element.
id = <string> - optional
text = <string>
The Windows File Open dialog opens. If the display is open, the
import cannot occur.
For more information about the XML file, see the Help.
<gfx>
</gfx>
<gfx>
<defs>
</defs>
<msi id=“indicator1”
</msi>
<msi id=“Indicator2”>
</msi>
</gfx>
You can specify multiple attributes for an element, and have multiple
elements. You can find a sample XML file in the Multistate Indicator
For example, if a multistate indicator has a border style set to line and
a shape set to circle, and you import an XML file to change the border
style to raised and the shape to rectangle, you could end up with a
rectangle with a border style set to line. This would happen if the
border style is specified before the shape in the XML file. Because
border style is specified first, it is applied to the object when it is still a
circle. Since a circle cannot have a raised border style, the change is not
made. After that, the shape is changed to rectangle
Graphic element
This is the root, or document element of an RSView graphic XML
document. It is called gfx in the multistate indicator XML document.
It represents a graphic display and contains all other elements and
collections in the document.
Font element
id = <string> Type a short name that you can use when referring to
the font element later in the XML file.
font-family = <string>
font-size = <int>
This element is called msi in the XML file. The msi element
corresponds to the General tab of the Multistate Indicator. An msi
element must be located within the gfx element.
borderwidth = <int>
description = <string>
height = <int>
id= <string> - must be the name of the object you are modifying.
Each multistate indicator object is automatically given a unique name
when it is created in the Graphics editor.
numstates = <int>
width = <int>
x = <int>
y = <int>
States collection
value = <int>
Image Element
Caption element
text = <string>
Connection element
name = <string>
expr = <string>
Animations collection
Animations element
expr = <string>
type = visibility
When the translators send the translated files back to you, you can
import them into your application, substituting the original language of
your application for the one contained in the translated text files.
the file format of the text file, including information about what
parts of the file should not be translated. You should share this
information with the translator to ensure that the file can be
imported after translation.
text that can be displayed at run time, but is used to operate your
application. For example, the names of graphic displays and
command strings.
text you add to your application that is not displayed at run time,
and cannot be exported.
text in the login dialog box that appears to operators at run time
text in the Recipe dialog box that appears to operators at run time
and so on.
System Tags
You might have used system tags in your application to display text in
graphic displays. System tags are always shown in the format prescribed
by the language of the Windows operating system—if you are running
the English language version of the Windows operating system, the
text in system tags is displayed in English, and dates and numbers are
formatted for U.S. English. These system tags include:
Time
Date
DateAndTimeString
MonthString
AlarmResetDateAndTimeString
Some of the text that you can add to your application is never shown
to the operator at run time. RSView Machine Edition deliberately does
not export this text because it is not displayed at run time.
The following text strings are not exported. The properties listed below
apply to all graphic objects in your application that support the
Exporting text
Text in your application is exported to tab-delimited text files in
Unicode format.
1. Ensure that the HMI project containing the text you want to
export is not being modified or edited. Components that are being
edited and have not been saved will not be saved before their text
is exported.
If you cancel the export before it is complete, any files that were created
are not deleted, but their contents might not be complete.
Importing text
To import text from a file into your application, the file must be saved
in Unicode Text format.
Text strings that exist in your application, but do not appear in the text
file are not deleted. This allows you to import only those strings that
have been modified.
1. Ensure that the HMI project into which you want to import text is
not being modified or edited. If a component is saved after you
have imported text for it, the imported text will be overwritten.
5. In the Select Files window, select the text files that contain the text
you want to import into your application.
Troubleshooting importing
Each time errors occur while importing text into an application, the
ImportErrors.txt file is overwritten.
If some, but not all, of the text in an HMI server appears to have been
modified, the import might have been canceled. If you cancel the
import before it is complete, any text strings that were changed are not
restored to their original values. To restore the text originally in the
application, import the text from the backup text file you created in
step 2 on page F-7.
ServerName defined in FileName.txt does not exist. None of the
strings in this file were imported. This error is logged if you are
importing text into an RSView Machine Edition application. This error
is logged if the name of the HMI server is invalid. If the HMI server
the string reference number has been modified in the text file, and
the new string reference number is not used in the application.
Open the backup text file, and then copy the correct the string
reference number into the translated text file.
the object was deleted from the application after the text was
exported. If this is correct, ignore the error.
4. Click Next.
1. Select the Tab check box. If any other check boxes are selected,
clear them.
3. Click Next.
5. Click Finish.
2. When closing the file, you are prompted to save changes. Click Yes.
3. You can save the file using its original name, or you can type a new
name.
If you use Notepad to open a Unicode text file that was saved in Excel,
you will notice some differences from a file edited and saved in
Notepad.
File schema
Comments
The text file uses the # symbol as a comment delimiter if it is the first
character on a line.
Header
The first seven lines of the text file contain header information that
should not be translated or modified.
The body of the text file starts on line eight, and includes the following
fields:
In the translated text file, the only text that should be modified is the
text inside the quotation marks in the string definition column. For
example, translated into German, the file would contain these changes:
Motor
abschalten
Index ■
I–1
Alarm Import Export Wizard E-1 displaying in the alarm status list 9-60
Alarm list graphic object 15-12, 16-269 expressions in 19-3
at run time 9-48, 27-22 hold time 9-38
linking buttons to 16-17 importing and exporting 9-3
navigating to 16-15 inactive 16-282
specifying time and date format for 24-19, keeping a permanent record of 9-5, 9-10
25-41, 26-37
notification methods for 9-4
using buttons with 9-53
Alarm log file 4-4, 9-9
printing 9-10, 9-35
deleting at application startup 24-15, 24-18, queueing 9-21
25-37, 25-42, 26-34, 26-38 resetting 9-9
printing contents of 9-10 resetting status of 9-27, 9-59
size 9-38 remotely 9-27
Alarm messages responding to 9-6
copying 9-36 retaining status of 9-60
creating 9-33 sending messages to the data source 9-24,
deleting 9-36 9-35
embedded variables in 20-2 setting up 9-28
printing at run time 9-10 silencing 9-8, 9-26, 9-37, 9-58
viewing at run time 27-22 remotely 9-26
Alarm monitoring sorting 9-9, 9-59
turning on and off 23-3 testing on the development computer 23-4
ALARM MULTI-LINE display 9-5 updating tag values for 9-38
copying 9-46 Analog tags 7-2
editing 9-41 data types 7-23
Alarm Setup editor 9-29
how floating-point values are rounded 7-2
using tags in 6-22
Alarm status list graphic object 15-12, logging values for 11-2
16-283 monitoring for alarms 9-3
at run time 9-51 setting up 7-21
linking buttons to 16-17 using to generate a range of alarms 9-11
navigating to 16-15 Animation 17-1
using buttons with 9-53 changing 17-40
Alarm status mode button graphic object checking 17-37
15-10, 16-37 copying 17-41
using with alarm status lists 9-53 defining range of motion for 17-10
Alarm triggers 9-4 for group objects 15-68, 17-37
creating 9-30 setting minimum and maximum values for
data types for 9-11 17-9
Alarms 9-1 testing 17-8
acknowledging 9-7, 9-22, 9-56 using expressions 17-9
remotely 9-22, 9-24, 9-26 using Object Smart Path 17-7, 17-11
clearing 9-8, 9-58 using tags and placeholders 17-8
creating your own display for 9-47 viewing in Object Explorer 15-35
deleting 9-58 Animation dialog box 17-3
displaying 9-5, 9-34, 9-37 Animation types 17-2
I–2 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
color 17-16 testing on the development computer 23-4
fill 17-22 transferring from a MobileView terminal
height 17-28 26-10
horizontal position 17-24 transferring from PanelView Plus or
horizontal slider 17-33 VersaView CE 25-12
rotation 17-30 transferring to MobileView 26-6
vertical position 17-25 transferring to PanelView Plus or VersaView
vertical slider 17-35 CE 25-8
visibility 17-13 versus projects 4-1
Arc graphic object 15-3, 15-21
width 17-26 Arithmetic operators
Application Explorer 2-4, 2-5
in expressions 19-11
showing and hiding 2-8
evaluation order of 19-18
using 2-8
Array tags 9-17
Application files
deleting from disk 2-19 data types for 9-17
Arrow images 14-27
viewing location of 4-20 Audiences
Application Manager 4-11
for diagnostics messages 10-6
Application properties
Audio indicator
viewing 4-19, 4-20 for alarms 9-34
Applications 2-1, 26-1
Auto repeat 16-20
backing up and restoring 4-11 AutoCAD files
closing 4-10 .dxf files 14-26
comparing 25-15, 26-14 Automatic logout 13-17
converting
PanelBuilder B-1 B
Background Color toolbar 15-47
PanelBuilder 1400e A-1 Background style
PanelBuilder 32 B-1 transparent 14-27
copying and deleting at run time 25-24, Backspace button graphic object 15-9,
26-22 16-36
copying, deleting, and renaming 4-11 Bar graph graphic object 15-7, 16-193,
creating 4-5 16-196
at run time 27-20
importing
using animation to create 17-20
PanelBuilder B-1
Bit arrays
PanelBuilder 1400e A-1 using to generate alarms based on priority
PanelBuilder 32 B-1 sequence 9-14
localizing using to generate multiple alarms 9-13
see Localizing applications Bit trigger type 9-13
opening 4-8 Bitmap files
Index ■
I–3
creating touch margins for 16-10 using KEPServerEnterprise 24-9,
linking to specific objects 16-17 25-32, 26-29
repeating button presses 16-20 Communication drivers 26-1
selecting objects to send button presses to setting up at run time 25-27, 26-23
16-15, 16-17 for transfer to MobileView 26-4
using function keys with 16-12 for transfer to PanelView Plus 25-6
using with alarm banners 15-9 for transfer to VersaView CE 25-6
using with lists 15-9 in Windows 2000 or Windows XP
using with numeric input objects 15-9 24-10
using with trends 15-9, 18-30 setting up in RSLinx Enterprise 26-6
Button presses at run time 24-10
repeating 16-20 for transfer to MobileView 26-6
sending to graphic objects 16-15, 16-17 for transfer to PanelView Plus 25-8
C for transfer to VersaView CE 25-8
Caches for data servers Communications
creating 5-9 displaying errors at run time 27-22
synchronizing 5-10 setting up 5-1
Circle graphic object 15-3, 15-22 testing on the development computer 23-4
Clear alarm banner button graphic object Communications tab 2-5
9-8, 15-10, 16-37 Components 2-11
using with alarm banners 9-53 adding into applications 2-17
Clear alarm history button graphic object file locations 4-2
15-10, 16-28 printing 2-21
clearing alarms with 9-8 working with 2-15
resetting alarms with 9-9 Constants
silencing alarms with 9-8 in expressions 19-11
Context menus 14-8
using to delete the alarm log file 9-10
Control list selector graphic object 15-5,
using with alarm lists 9-54 16-209
Close display button graphic object 15-4,
at run time 27-19
16-157
linking buttons to 16-17
and alarms 9-48
navigating to 16-15
and diagnostics messages 10-25
using Enter key handshaking with 16-23
and information messages 12-13, 12-14 Control list selectors
using to navigate 22-4, 22-7 differences from piloted control list selectors
Color 16-220
blinking 17-19, C-1 ControlLogix processors 6-3
for graphic objects 15-47 addressing syntax for 7-20
in graphic displays 14-19 creating tags in 6-5
animating 17-16 Controls 15-2
in trends 18-9 assigning to graphic objects 15-52
Color animation 15-8, 17-16 using the Property Panel 15-45
at run time 27-21 expressions 15-2
COM port for alarms 9-4, 9-20, 9-25
for serial communications tags 15-2
I–4 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Current trends 11-1, 18-3 ALARM display 9-5
DIAGNOSTICS display 10-19
D INFORMATION display 12-5
Data log files 4-4, 11-2
DEFAULT user 13-9
deleting 24-15, 25-37, 26-34 DeskLock tool 13-2, 24-20
Data log models 11-2 Device addresses
changing the model to use at run time editing at run time 25-31, 26-27
11-14 Device shortcuts
creating 11-7 editing at run time 24-7, 25-17, 26-18
deleting tags from 11-2 Device tags 7-4, 7-27
specifying how much data to store 11-8 addressing syntax for 7-19
specifying the storage location 11-9 DH+ driver
specifying the tags to log 11-13 setting up at run time 25-28, 25-30, 26-24,
specifying when to log data 11-11 26-26
using with trends 18-28 using at run time 25-27, 26-23
Data Log Models editor 11-6 DH+ network
using tags in 6-26 connecting to at run time 25-28, 26-24
Data logging 11-1 Diagnostics clear all button graphic object
Index ■
I–5
displaying at run time 10-18, 10-22, 27-22 terminal 25-21
displaying during application development Display Settings dialog box 14-16
10-7 Display size
local log file for 10-10 Window size 4-12
I–6 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Ellipse graphic object 15-3, 15-22 math functions in 19-20
Embedded variables 20-1 monitoring for alarms 9-3
copying 20-10 operators in
creating 20-3 arithmetic 19-11
deleting 20-11
bitwise 19-15
displaying at run time 20-12
logical 19-13
editing 20-11
types of values 20-1 relational 19-12
updating at run time 20-11 security functions in 19-20
End button graphic object 15-9, 16-36 tags and placeholders in 17-6, 19-9
using with alarm objects 9-56 using in macros 21-6
using with diagnostics lists 10-26 viewing in Object Explorer 15-35
using with trends 18-32 Write expressions 19-24
Enter button graphic object 15-9, 16-36
and Enter key handshaking 16-23 F
FactoryTalk Diagnostics 10-1, 10-2
using with alarm objects 9-7, 9-56
Enter key handshaking 16-23 Diagnostics messages 10-1
Error messages setting up
Diagnostics messages 27-4 on a Windows 2000 or Windows XP
Problems at run time 27-4 run-time computer 24-8
Ethernet driver FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer
setting up at run time 25-28, 26-24 viewing diagnostics log files in 10-8
using at run time 25-27, 26-23 Windows Event Viewer 10-8
using to transfer applications 26-6 FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer tool 10-8
Ethernet network File names 4-2
connecting to at run time 25-28, 26-24 and spaces 4-5
Export maximum length of 4-5
alarm files 9-3, E-1
Fill animation 15-8, 17-22
Expression editor 19-3 at run time 27-21
using tags in 6-7 Folders 7-5
Expression results adding HMI tags to 7-14
for animation 17-7 creating 7-13
rounding 19-2 creating in the Tag Browser 7-32
types of values 19-2 deleting 7-16
Expressions 19-1 duplicating 7-15
and animation 17-9 nesting 7-14
assigning to controls 6-24 opening 7-13
assigning to graphic objects 15-52 using in the Tag Browser 6-11
using the Property Panel 15-45 Fonts
checking syntax 19-6 copying and deleting 26-22
constants in 19-11 copying and deleting at run time 25-24
copying 19-8 in graphic displays
creating 19-7 substitution at run time 15-15
evaluation order of operators 19-18 in trends 18-9
formatting 19-9 transferring 25-8
if-then-else logic in 19-21 Foreground Color toolbar 15-47
Index ■
I–7
Freehand graphic object 15-3, 15-22 disabling input focus for 14-18
Function keys illustrating 15-3
assigning to graphic objects 16-12 limiting access to 13-20, 14-17
changing 16-15 maximum number licensed to use 4-21
navigating between 22-1
G objects for 22-4
Gauge graphic object 15-7, 16-193, 16-200
at run time 27-20 testing navigation 22-3
specifying number format for 24-19, 25-41, numbering 8-6, 8-8, 14-16
26-37 opening 14-5
Global connections 8-1 planning 3-3, 14-2
setting up 8-9 positioning 14-19
updating tag values for 8-10 printing 14-47
using to change displays remotely 8-6, 8-8, at run time 14-47
22-9 remotely 8-2, 14-48
using to print displays remotely 8-2 setting up printer 24-11
using to run macros 8-6, 21-3 setting up 14-14
Global Connections editor 8-9, 14-48
Goto configure mode button graphic object
sizing 4-13, 14-15, 14-18
15-4, 16-28 specifying the first display to open 23-3
using to navigate 22-4 testing 14-13
Goto display button graphic object 15-4, animation 17-8
16-149 title bar in 4-15
and alarms 9-47, 9-48 types of 14-14
and diagnostics messages 10-25 default type 14-4
and information messages 12-14 updating tag values for 14-18
assigning visibility animation to 13-24 using parameter files with 14-34
positioning displays with 14-19 viewing in detail 14-12
using parameter files with 14-38 Graphic Displays editor 14-3
using to navigate 22-4, 22-5 undoing and redoing actions in 14-12
Graphic displays 14-1 using tags in 6-22
assigning tag values for 14-20 Graphic images
background color of 14-19 deleting 14-32
changing remotely 8-6, 22-9 importing 14-26
security issues 8-7 monochrome 14-27
setting up 8-8 selecting for a graphic object 14-31
using global connections 8-2 that come with RSView Studio 14-27
when a user logs out 8-7, 13-23 viewing 14-29
Graphic libraries 14-22
creating 14-3 ALARM BANNER display 9-40
creating a background for 14-20 ALARM MULTI-LINE display 9-5, 9-41
default changing file location for 14-24
ALARM display 9-5 copying 9-46
DIAGNOSTICS display 10-19 creating 14-23
INFORMATION display 12-5 HISTORY display 9-5, 9-44
developing a hierarchy for 22-2 opening 14-22
I–8 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Sliders library 17-34 gauge 15-7, 16-193, 16-200
STATUS display 9-5, 9-43 goto configure mode button 15-4, 16-28
Trends library 18-29 goto display button 15-4, 16-149
Graphic Libraries editor 14-22 home button 15-9, 16-36
Graphic object types information acknowledge button 15-10,
acknowledge alarm button 15-9, 16-37 16-28
acknowledge all alarms button 15-9, 16-28 information message display 15-12, 16-293
ActiveX objects 15-28 interlocked push button 15-5, 16-86
activeX objects 15-2 latched push button 15-5, 16-66
alarm banner 15-12, 16-276 list indicator 15-7, 16-186
alarm list 15-12, 16-269 local message display 15-12, 16-234
alarm status list 15-12, 16-283 login button 15-4, 16-27
alarm status mode button 15-10, 16-37 logout button 15-4, 16-27
backspace button 15-9, 16-36 macro button 16-238
bar graph 15-7, 16-193, 16-196 maintained push button 15-5, 16-57
button graphic objects 15-1 momentary push button 15-5, 16-48
clear alarm banner button 15-10, 16-37 move down button 15-9, 16-37
clear alarm history button 15-10, 16-28 move left button 15-9, 16-37
close display button 15-4, 16-157 move right button 15-9, 16-37
control list selector 15-5, 16-209 move up button 15-9, 16-37
diagnostics clear all button 15-10, 16-28 multistate graphic objects 15-1
diagnostics clear button 15-10, 16-37 multistate indicator 15-7, 16-172
diagnostics list 15-12, 16-289 multistate push button 15-5, 16-76
display list selector 15-4, 16-164 next pen button 15-9, 16-36
display print button 15-4, 16-27 numeric display 15-11, 16-103
drawing objects 15-2 numeric input cursor point 15-11, 16-123
arcs 15-3, 15-21 numeric input enable button 15-11, 16-109
circles 15-3, 15-22 page down button 15-9, 16-37
ellipses 15-3, 15-22 page up button 15-9, 16-37
freehand objects 15-3, 15-22 pause button 16-36
images 15-3, 15-18 pausebutton 15-9
lines 15-3, 15-23 piloted control list selector 15-6, 16-220
panels 15-3, 15-20 print alarm history button 15-4, 16-248
polygons 15-3, 15-24 print alarm status button 15-4, 16-258
ramp button 15-5, 16-94
polylines 15-3, 15-24
reset alarm status button 16-28
rectangles 15-3, 15-25
reset alarm status mode button 15-10
rounded rectangles 15-3, 15-26
return to display button 15-4, 16-27
squares 15-3, 15-25 scale 15-7, 16-193, 16-206
text 15-3, 15-15 shutdown button 15-4, 16-28
wedge 15-3 silence alarms button 15-10, 16-28
wedges 15-21 sort alarms button 15-10, 16-28
end button 15-9, 16-36 string display 15-11, 16-135
enter button 15-9, 16-36 string input enable button 15-11, 16-139
Index ■
I–9
symbol 15-7, 16-180 using to illustrate displays 15-3
time and date display 15-7, 16-245 using to navigate 22-4
trend 15-7 using to start and control processes 15-5
Graphic objects 14-1, 15-1 visibility
aligning 15-74 setting up 16-2
animating 17-3 Graphics toolbar 14-6
arranging 15-72, 15-76 Grid
assigning controls to 15-52 in graphic displays 14-10
using the Property Panel 15-45 in trends 18-10, 18-20, 18-23
coloring 15-47 Group objects
converting to wallpaper 14-20 animating 15-68, 17-37
copying 15-61 creating 15-68
creating 15-14, 15-15 editing 15-70
selecting tools 15-12 naming 15-50
setting up in the Property Panel 15-43
deleting 15-68
deselecting 15-31 H
duplicating 15-63 Height animation 15-8, 17-28
editing 15-60 at run time 27-21
embedded variables in 20-2 Historical trends 11-1, 18-3
group objects 15-1 HISTORY display 9-5
grouping and ungrouping 15-68 editing 9-44
HMI servers 2-8, 4-1
moving 15-60
HMI tag folders 7-11
naming 15-50 HMI tags 6-2, 7-1
navigating between 16-15 addressing syntax for 7-19
positioning 15-72 Analog tags 7-1
with grid 14-10 browsing for 6-7
replacing tags and expressions in 15-56 creating 7-14, 7-17, 7-28
resizing 15-64 in the Tag Browser 7-32
selecting 15-31 data sources 7-3, 7-27
setting up 16-1 deleting 7-19
using the Properties dialog box 15-37 Device tags 7-1
using the Property Panel 15-42 Digital tags 7-1
spatial properties duplicating 7-18
setting up 16-2 editing 7-18
using at run time 16-9 in the Tag Browser 7-32
using keys to work with exporting 7-35
Special keys 15-66 how to use 6-7
using to display alarms and messages 15-12 importing 7-33, 7-35
using to display processes 15-7 Memory tags 7-1
using to enter and display numeric and string merging databases 7-35
values naming 7-5
using to enter and display string values searching for 7-10
15-11 String tags 7-1
I–10 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
System tags 7-1 updating tag values for 12-11
when to use 6-5 viewing at run time 27-22
Hold time Information Messages editor 12-7
for alarms 9-38 Information Setup editor 12-9
Home button graphic object 15-9, 16-36 Initial values for tags
using with alarm objects 9-56 assigning to memory tags 7-28
using with diagnostics lists 10-26 Tag values 6-27, 21-1
using with trends 18-32 Input devices
Horizontal position animation 15-8, 17-24 run-time settings for 25-25
at run time 27-21 Input focus
Horizontal slider animation 15-8, 17-11, disabling for graphic displays 14-18
17-33 giving to graphic objects 16-15
at run time 27-18 specifying behavior of 14-20
Interlocked push button graphic object
I 15-5, 16-86
If-then-else logic at run time 27-18
in expressions 19-21 ISA symbols 14-27
nesting 19-22 Isolated graphing
Image Browser 14-30 in trends 18-8
Image graphic object 15-3, 15-18
Images editor 14-29 K
Import KEPServerEnterprise
alarm files 9-3, E-1 array tag syntax 9-19
multistate indicator files 16-172, E-1 run-time communications with
Indicators 16-171 specifying COM port for 24-9, 25-32,
Information acknowledge button graphic ob-
ject 15-10, 16-28
26-29
Key repeat settings 25-25
at run time 12-13
Keyboard
INFORMATION display 12-5
at run time 27-22 run-time settings for 25-25
Keyboard button symbols
editing 12-12
ISA symbols 14-27
opening and closing 12-14 Keyboard navigation 16-15
window size 4-14 Keypad
Information message display graphic object run-time settings for 25-25
15-12, 16-293
at run time 12-14, 27-22 L
in the INFORMATION display 12-5 Latched push button graphic object 15-5,
Information message files 12-3, 12-7 16-66
changing the file to use at run time 12-15 at run time 27-17
Information messages 12-1 Least Significant Bit
copying 12-9 trigger type
creating 12-7 using with the list indicator 16-189
creating your own display for 12-13 using with the multistate indicator
deleting 12-8 16-174
displaying 12-9, 23-3 using with the symbol indicator 16-182
embedded variables in 20-2 Least Significant Bit trigger type 9-14
setting up 12-6 Libraries
Index ■
I–11
Graphic libraries 14-22 M
License Macro button graphic object 16-238
viewing maximum allowable graphic displays using to run macros 21-2
4-21 Macros
Line graphic object 15-3, 15-23 creating 21-1
List indicator graphic object 15-7, 16-186
login and logout 13-11, 13-15
at run time 27-20 remote
Local message display graphic object
14-41, 15-12, 16-234 running from the data source 8-6, 21-3
at run time 14-46, 27-22 startup and shutdown 23-3
using with message files 14-40 for graphic displays 14-20
Local message files 14-41, 14-44 Macros editor 21-5
Local messages 14-40 using tags in 6-27
copying 14-46 Maintained push button graphic object
I–12 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
16-37 26-37
setting up auto repeat for 16-21 Numeric embedded variables
using with alarm objects 9-56 creating 20-5
using with diagnostics lists 10-26 Numeric input cursor point graphic object
Index ■
I–13
OPC communications using tags in 6-8
and RSLinx for RSView 5-1 Passwords 13-2
setting up 5-1 changing 13-12
using to connect to ControlLogix processors setting up 13-11, 13-16
7-20 Pause button graphic object 15-9, 16-36
OPC servers using with trends 18-31
items in 7-20, 7-27 Piloted control list selector graphic object
OPC tags 15-6, 16-220
addressing syntax for 7-19 controlling remotely 16-222
Operators differences from control list selectors
Expressions 19-11 16-220
Oracle Placeholders
logging to 10-11 Tag placeholders 17-8
PLC tags
P importing 7-33
Page down button graphic object 15-9, Polygon graphic object 15-3, 15-24
16-37 Polyline graphic object 15-3, 15-24
setting up auto repeat for 16-21 Preconfigured graphic displays
using with alarm objects 9-56 ALARM display 9-5
using with diagnostics lists 10-26 DIAGNOSTICS display 10-19
Page up button graphic object 15-9, 16-37 INFORMATION display 12-5
setting up auto repeat for 16-21 Print alarm history button graphic object
I–14 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
data logging 11-15 Return to display button graphic object
Index ■
I–15
starting and exiting 2-1 on the MobileView terminal 26-1
RSView tags on VersaView CE terminals 25-5
importing 7-36 setting up 25-16, 26-17
Run time
shutting down 24-21, 25-44, 26-39
changing tag values 27-16
transferring
deleting log files 24-18, 25-42, 26-38
from MobileView 26-10
displaying tag values 27-19
from PanelView Plus or VersaView CE
entering numeric values 27-5
25-12
entering string values 27-12
to MobileView 26-2, 26-6
font substitution 15-15
logging in and out 27-2, 27-5 to PanelView 25-2, 25-8
problems with logging in 27-4 to VersaView CE 25-2, 25-8
printing 2-23 to Windows 2000 or Windows XP
printing graphic displays 14-47 24-2, 24-4
Run-time application file
setting up communication drivers
creating 23-5
in Windows 2000 or Windows XP
Run-time screen resolution 4-12
24-10
setting up printers S
in Windows 2000 or Windows XP Sample applications 2-2
24-11 Scale graphic object 15-7, 16-193, 16-206
Screen resolution
setting up RSLinx Enterprise drivers 25-27,
at run time 4-12
26-23
Screen size
time, date, and number formats 24-19, Window size 4-12
25-41, 26-37 Security 13-1
using graphic objects 16-9 adding groups 13-12
viewing alarms and messages 27-22 adding users 13-12
viewing communication errors 27-22 and remote display changes 8-7
Run-time application 26-1
controlling who can stop the application
.mer files 25-1 13-18
COM port for serial communications logging in and out 13-16
for KEPServerEnterprise removing groups 13-14
communications 24-9, 25-32, 26-29 removing users 13-14
opening 24-6, 25-16, 26-17 setting up 13-2
in Windows 2000 or Windows XP using visibility animation 13-18, 13-24,
24-5, 24-13 17-15
on MobileView 26-32 Security codes 13-3
on PanelView Plus 25-35 assigning to graphic displays 13-20, 14-17
on VersaView CE 25-35 assigning to user accounts 13-11, 13-16
Security functions
running 24-21, 25-43, 26-39
in expressions 19-20
in Windows 2000 or Windows XP
using 13-5, 13-24, 17-15
24-6 Serial communications
on MobileView 26-16 using KEPServerEnterprise 24-9, 25-32,
on PanelView Plus terminals 25-5 26-29
I–16 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
Serial downloads Standard toolbar 2-5
cable to use for 25-9, 26-7, 26-11 Startup display
Serial driver specifying 23-3
setting up at run time 25-28, 26-24 Startup editor 23-2
using at run time 25-27, 26-23 Startup macro
using to transfer applications 26-6 Macros 21-1
Servers
Startup settings 23-1
States
data 5-3
Shutdown button graphic object 15-4, 16-28
multistate graphic objects 15-1
States toolbar 15-51
assigning visibility animation to 13-25 Status bar 2-7, 14-7
limiting access to 13-18 showing and hiding 2-8
locating in display hierarchy 22-2 STATUS display 9-5
using to navigate 22-4, 22-9 copying 9-46
using to shut down application 24-21, editing 9-43
25-44, 26-39 Storage Card directory
using to stop application 23-5 in Windows CE 25-38, 26-35
Shutdown macro String display graphic object 15-11, 16-135
Macros 21-1 at run time 27-20
Siemens devices 5-2 String embedded variables
Silence alarms button graphic object 9-8, creating 20-7
15-10, 16-28 String input enable button graphic object
using with alarm objects 9-54 15-11, 16-139
SLC tags at run time 27-12, 27-18
importing 7-33 how values are written 27-14
Sort alarms button graphic object 9-9, navigating to 16-15
15-10, 16-28
using Enter key handshaking with 16-23
using with alarm lists 9-55
String pop-up windows
Special keys
using at run time 27-12, 27-13
arrows, using with graphic objects 15-66
String tags 7-2
Ctrl
setting up 7-26
copying objects with 15-62 String values
drawing objects with 15-22, 15-23, tag values 15-11
15-24, 15-25, 15-26 using graphic objects to display and enter
resizing objects with 15-65 15-11
rotating objects with 15-80 Strings
selecting objects with 15-31 see Text
Sybase SQL Server
Shift, using with graphic objects 15-61, logging to 10-11
15-65, 15-66 Symbol graphic object 15-7, 16-180
using to navigate at run time 16-16 at run time 27-20
using with numeric pop-up windows 27-8 Syntax
using with string pop-up windows 27-13 checking tag syntax 19-6
Spreadsheets System activity
in the Tags editor 7-16 Diagnostics messages 10-1
in the User Accounts editor 13-11 System event log
working in 2-13 viewing at run time 25-40
Square graphic object 15-3, 15-25 System tags 7-2, C-1
Index ■
I–17
alarm reset date and time C-1 for global connections 8-10
for making graphic objects blink C-1 for information messages 12-11
time and date C-2 using graphic objects to display 15-11
viewing in the Tags editor 7-12 using graphic objects to set 15-5, 15-11
System time and date C-2 using macros to assign 6-27, 21-1
Tags 6-1
T addressing syntax 7-19
Tag Browser
Analog tags 6-1
displaying tag properties in 6-18
Array tags 6-1
displaying tags in 6-14
assigning to controls 6-21
folders in 6-11
assigning to graphic objects 15-52
opening 6-7
using the Property Panel 15-45
selecting tags in 6-15
viewing in Object Explorer 15-35
updating tags in 6-14
using 6-10, 7-31 basic steps for using 6-3
using wildcards in 6-19 browsing for 6-7
Tag Import and Export Wizard 7-35 Data server tags 6-1
Tag placeholders 14-33, 15-58 Digital tags 6-1
creating 15-59, 17-9, 19-11 displaying data type of 6-18
using in expressions 19-9 displaying in Tag Browser 6-14
using with animation 17-8 displaying properties of 6-18
Tag statistics HMI tags 6-1
viewing 7-9 limits
Tag substitution 6-25, 15-56 in graphic displays 14-2
Tag syntax
off-line
for array tags
browsing for 6-9
KEPServerEnterprise 9-19
selecting in Tag Browser 6-15
RSLinx Enterprise 9-19
String tags 6-1
Tag values
System tags 6-1
assigning
updating in Tag Browser 6-14
when a display opens or closes 14-20
using in expressions 17-6, 19-9
when a user logs in or out 13-11, 13-15 Tags editor 7-6
when an application starts or stops Test mode 14-13
23-3 Text
assigning initial values importing and exporting
to memory tags 7-28 see Localizing applications
Text graphic object 15-3, 15-15
changing at run time 27-16
blinking 17-19
displaying at run time 27-19
editing 15-18
ensuring the data source has read 16-23
Time and date
logging 6-26, 11-2 at run time 24-19, 25-41, 26-37
updating setting using global connections 8-3
for alarms 9-38 system tags C-2
for data logging 11-12 updating 8-3
for displays 14-18 Time and date display graphic object 15-7,
I–18 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide
16-245 XY Plot 18-7
at run time 27-21 coloring 18-9
specifying time and date format for 24-19, creating 18-12
25-41, 26-37 grid 18-20, 18-23
Time and date embedded variables
linking buttons to 16-17
creating 20-9
Title bar
minimum and maximum values for 18-5,
and security 13-18 18-21
in graphic displays 4-15 navigating to 16-15
in On Top displays 14-17 pens 18-6
Toolbars 2-4 icons 18-6, 18-16
Background Color toolbar 15-47 markers 18-6
Foreground Color toolbar 15-47 setting up 18-26
Graphics toolbar 14-6 plotting values across the chart 18-9
in the Graphic Displays editor 14-6, 14-9 setting up 18-4, 18-11, 18-13
Objects toolbar 14-6 specifying number, time, and date format for
showing and hiding 2-8 24-19, 25-41, 26-37
Standard toolbar 2-5 specifying tags and expressions to plot data
States toolbar 15-51 for 18-25
Tools specifying the amount of data to store
Application Manager 4-11 18-18
DeskLock 13-2, 24-20 testing 18-10
diagnostic setup 10-9 troubleshooting
Diagnostics Viewer 10-8 Help 18-33
Tag Import and Export Wizard 7-35 window 18-4
Transfer Utility 25-10, 25-13, 26-8, 26-12 x (horizontal) axis 18-6, 18-19
Touch margins labels 18-6, 18-20
using on buttons 16-10 y (vertical) axis 18-5, 18-21
Touch screen
labels 18-5, 18-22
run-time settings for 25-25
Trigger values
Touch screens
positioning objects for 16-10 for alarms 9-4, 9-11, 9-34
Transfer Utility tool 25-10, 25-13, 26-8, 26-12 for information messages 12-4, 12-7
Translating applications for local messages 14-43
see Localizing applications Troubleshooting
Transparent background style 14-27 Problems at run time 27-4
Trend data
printing at run time 18-32 U
remotely 18-32 Update rate
Trend graphic object 15-7, 18-1 tag
and data logging 11-1 for alarms 9-38
at run time 27-21 for data logging 11-12
border 18-4 for displays 14-18
chart 18-5, 18-14 for global connections 8-10
isolated graphing in 18-8, 18-22 for information messages 12-11
types 18-7 User accounts 13-3
Index ■
I–19
adding 13-12 running applications on 25-1, 26-1
DEFAULT user 13-9 Windows domain
deleting 13-12 logging in to 27-1
displaying current user 19-20 Windows metafiles
removing 13-14 .wmf files 14-26
Windows network domain
setting up 13-10
adding users or groups 13-12
User Accounts editor 13-7
WINtelligent LOGIC 5 tags
Users
importing 7-35
logging in and out 13-16, 27-2, 27-5
Workbook Mode 2-7
W
Wallpaper
converting graphic objects to 14-20
unlocking 14-21
Wedge graphic object 15-3, 15-21
Width animation 15-8, 17-26
at run time 27-21
Wildcards 7-5, 7-10
using to select tags 6-19
Window size
default graphic displays 4-14
project 4-13
Windows 2000 or Windows XP
editing device shortcuts on 24-7
running applications in 24-1
run-time terminal settings 24-5
Windows CE 26-1
Storage Card directory 25-38, 26-35
Windows CE Terminals
logging diagnostics messages from 10-8
Windows CE terminals
editing device shortcuts on 25-17, 26-18
I–20 ■
RSView Machine Edition User’s Guide